If 
 
 I 
 
 OF THE 
 E ALAND 
 G U A G E 
 
 UC-NRLF 
 
 SB 3A1 13b 
 
4 
 
GRAMMAR 
 
 OF THE 
 
 NEW ZEALAND LANGUAGE. 
 
GRAMMAR 
 
 OF TIIE 
 
 NEW ZEALAND LANGUAGE 
 
 BY 
 
 R. MAUNSELL, LL.D., 
 
 ARCHDEACON OF AUCKLAND. 
 
 FOURTH EDITION. 
 
 UPTON & CO., 
 
 AUCKLAND 
 
 MDCCCXCIY. 
 
 PRINTED IN NEW ZEALANE 
 
printed by 
 
 Wilsons & Horton, General Printers, 
 auckland. 
 
/S1f 
 
 PKEFACE TO FIEST EDITION. 
 
 Independently of minute and numerous subdivisions, 
 it may, perhaps, be correct to state that there are 
 spoken in this, the northern island, seven leading dia- 
 lects, each more or less distinguished from the other, 
 viz.: 1st, theRarawa, or that spoken to the northward 
 of Kaitaia ; 2nd, the Ngapuhi, or that spoken in that 
 portion of the island as far south of Kaitaia as Point 
 Bodney on the eastern coast, and Kaipara on the 
 western; 3rd, the Waikato, or that spoken in the 
 district lying between Point Rodney and Tauranga on 
 the east, and Kaipara and Mokau on the west ; 4th, 
 that spoken in the Bay of Plenty; 5th, the dialect 
 of the East Cape and its neighbourhood, in which, 
 perhaps, may be included that of Rotorua, though in 
 these two places many little differences might be 
 detected; 6th, that spoken in the line of coast between 
 Port Nicholson and Wanganui, though here, also, at 
 least four different branches might be traced ; 7th, 
 and last, that spoken between Wanganui and Mokau. 
 The dialect of Taupo may be, perhaps, considered a 
 mixture of those of Rotorua and Waikato. 
 
 M5063M 
 
VI 11. PREFACE. 
 
 All these may be stated to bear to each other a 
 remarkable radical affinity. Many words, it is true, 
 may be found in one which are unknown in another ; 
 but the grammar of any one will give a great insight 
 into the texture of all. 
 
 The Waikato dialect is very generally known 
 throughout the larger portion of the island. It has 
 deeply tinctured that of Taupo, and is well-known at 
 Tauranga and the Bay of Plenty, and has been carried 
 to the summits of Taranaki by the multitudes whom 
 its fierce warriors once dragged from thence in slavery, 
 and whose chains have since been snapped by the 
 power of the Gospel. Ngapuhi to the northward are 
 well acquainted with it, from the number of slaves who 
 had been fetched from thence by the warrior Hongi ; 
 and a little before his time it was carried to the neigh- 
 bourhood of Port Nicholson by two large and distinct 
 migrations one by Ngatitoa, who were the original 
 possessors of Kawhia ; another by Ngatiraukawa, who 
 formerly occupied Maungatautari, and as far as Taupo. 
 
 The four tribes, also, who now occupy the banks of 
 the Thames, resided formerly for a very long period 
 in Waikato, and, being sprung from the same stock, 
 speak a language so similar that a critical ear can 
 scarcely tell the difference between the dialects of the 
 two people.* 
 
 * Marutuahu, from Kawhia, is the great progenitor of the 
 Thames tribes, and his name is often used to designate that 
 people. Kawhia, we may add, is the place at which, according 
 to the accounts of the people of Waikato, Taranaki, as well as 
 those of Ngatiruanui, the early immigrants, landed. 
 
PREFACE. IX. 
 
 The origin of this people, what part of this island 
 was first occupied, whether it was not colonized by 
 different migrations from different islands, are points 
 as yet buried in darkness. 
 
 That it was not occupied by merely one migration 
 has ever been the opinion of the author since he heard 
 of the different condition and habits of the people of 
 the East Cape and those of Waikato. A survey of 
 the different dialects will confirm the conjecture, and 
 nowhere can we get a better illustration than at Taupo. 
 For that magnificent lake, in the centre of the island, 
 and the point of meeting for two parties, as they 
 approach from either coast, presents also a remarkable 
 diversity in the languages spoken on the eastern and 
 western banks. On the eastern, the dialect corres- 
 ponds closely with that of Eotorua, from which it is 
 distant about a four days' journey; on the north- 
 western, which is occupied by a remnant left by the 
 Ngatiraukawa in their great migration to the south- 
 ward, the dialect is remarkably similar to that spoken 
 in Waikato.* 
 
 The points of similarity between the fundamental 
 principles of the Hebrew language and those of Maori 
 have been occasionally noticed : not, however, because 
 the author entertains any opinion that the two 
 
 * These remarks might also be extended to Rotorua lakes, on 
 the north-western extremity also of which are residing another 
 remnant of Ngatiraukawa, whose dialect is, as far as the author 
 recollects, different from that spoken by Ngatiwokaaue. 
 
X. PREFACE. 
 
 languages can claim any direct relationship to each 
 other. Upon this only would he insist, in reply to 
 those who would bind him down to the model of some 
 of the European grammars, that Maori, like Hebrew, 
 is altogether different from those languages in 
 structure ; that every subject of scientific inquiry 
 must have rules and an arrangement suited to its 
 nature ; and that, as it would be absurd to construct 
 the English on the basis of the Latin, so would it be 
 more out of course to think of finding in Maori 
 declensions, conjugations, modes of comparison, &c, 
 &c, as accurately defined, or conducted on the same 
 principles, as those of languages so polished, and so 
 adapted for expressing as well the minutest varieties 
 in thought as the tenderest emotions of the feelings. 
 
 And here the author would acknowledge his obli- 
 gations to Professor Lee for his theory of the Hebrew 
 tenses. On no other hypothesis can a satisfactory 
 solution be given of the Maori tense. 
 
 The student is requested to notice that the remarks 
 that are more suited to a beginner are printed in 
 large type, and that matters which are of less import- 
 ance to him are contained in the smaller. It will be, 
 perhaps, most advisable for him to omit the perusal of 
 the latter until he has mastered the former. 
 
 Waikato Heads, 
 
 February, 1842. 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 >K 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 ORTHOEPY. 
 The letters of Maori 
 Of the sound of the vowels 
 Of the diphthongs 
 
 Homogeneous sounds, when they meet in a sentence 
 Of the consonants 
 A table of peculiarities of pronunciation in the principal dialects. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 OF THE ARTICLE. 
 The articles 
 
 Of the definite article te 
 Of its plural nga 
 Of the indefinite article he 
 Of te tahi when used as an article 
 Of the particle a. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 OF THE NOUNS. 
 
 Nouns primitive and derivative 
 Compound words 
 Verbal nouns 
 Proper names 
 Gender of nouns 
 Number of nouns 
 Of the postfix ma 
 Reduplication of nouns 
 Cases of nouns. 
 
Xll. CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 OF THE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Their gender, number, and case 
 Reduplication of. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 OE THE NUMERALS. 
 Of the cardinals 
 Their prefixes 
 
 Their manner of combination, &c. 
 Prefixes for denoting 
 
 Persons 
 
 Distribution 
 
 Fractions of length. 
 
 Ordinals, 
 Three ways for denoting them. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Of the personal pronouns 
 
 Of the possessive pronouns 
 
 Of the relative pronouns 
 
 Of the demonstrative pronouns 
 
 Of mi, na, and ra 
 
 Of the interrogative pronouns 
 
 Mode of supplying the defect of distributive pronouns 
 
 Of the indefinite pronouns. 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 OF THE VERBS. 
 
 Verbs primitive, derivative, and compound 
 
 Mood 
 
 Tense 
 
 Imperative mood 
 
 Paradigm of tense in simple sentences 
 
 Passive voice (table of examples) 
 
 Remarks on 
 Verbal nouns (their formation) 
 Neuter verbs 
 Participial adjectives. 
 
CONTENTS. Xlll. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 OF THE PREPOSITIONS. ' 
 
 List of prepositions 
 
 Remarks on them 
 
 Proper meaning of na, ma, &c. 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 OF THE ADVERBS. 
 
 Primitive and derivative adverbs 
 
 Classification and list of adverbs and adverbial expressions. 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 OF THE PARTICLES. 
 Atu, mai, ake, iho, ai, ano, ra, koa, u, hoki, kau. 
 
 CHAPTER XI. 
 
 Of the conjunctions. 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 Of the interjections. 
 
 CHAPTER XIII. 
 OF THE SYNTAX. 
 
 Preliminary Remarks. 
 Terms explained 
 
 Complex and incomplex propositions 
 Remarks on the general features of Maori 
 Epanorthosis. 
 
 CHAPTER XI V. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 
 Ko an article 
 Its peculiar features 
 The omission of the article 
 He and te tahi 
 The particle a. 
 
XIV. CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER XV. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 
 
 Nouns in apposition 
 
 Article prefixed to them 
 
 Preposition 
 
 Exceptions 
 
 Clauses in epanorthosis, irregularity of 
 
 The answer to a question, construction of. 
 
 Possessive Case denotes. 
 Intensity- 
 Date of an act 
 Useful in predication 
 Used instead of other cases 
 
 Position of, when the governing word is twice repeated 
 Governing word often omitted 
 Material, or quality, of a thing how denoted by a substantive 
 The form of the substantive often used for that of the adjective. 
 
 Objective Case. 
 
 Position of 
 How compound words govern others 
 Kai prefixed to a verb 
 Te prefixed to proper names 
 Ngati and rangi 
 and A, distinction between. 
 
 CHAPTER XVI. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Position of adjectives 
 
 Verbal adjectives 
 
 Exceptions 
 
 Many adjectives to one substantive 
 
 One adjective to two or more substantives 
 
 Of the forms occasionally assumed by the adjective 
 
 Comparison of adjectives. 
 
CONTENTS. XV. 
 
 CHAPTER XVII. 
 SYNTAX OF NUMERALS. 
 
 Particles prefixed to numerals 
 
 Case following 
 
 Position of numeral 
 
 Repetition of numeral 
 
 Tua and wliaha as numeral prefixes. 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII. 
 
 SYNTAX OF PHONO JNS. 
 
 Position of pronouns 
 
 Often omitted 
 
 Singular and dual often denote a tribe 
 
 Other uses of 
 A pronoun in the singular will refer to a noun in the plural 
 
 In the third person will refer to the first or second person 
 
 Used for the conjunction and 
 The noun belonging to the pronoun often omitted 
 Relative pronouns, the substitutes for them. 
 
 Demonstrative Pronouns, 
 
 Useful as auxiliaries 
 
 Other peculiarities of 
 Nei, na, and ra 
 Interrogative pronouns (strange use of). 
 
 CHAPTER XIX. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 
 
 The Verbal Particles. 
 E 
 
 Ana 
 E ana 
 Ka 
 I 
 
 Kua 
 Kia 
 
 Kia and hi te, distinction between 
 Sometimes no verbal particle prefixed 
 Ai as used in connection with the verb 
 Wha/ca, uses of 
 
XVI. CONTENTS. 
 
 Adverbs as auxiliaries 
 
 Defect of substantive verb, how supplied 
 
 Prepositions as auxiliaries 
 
 Tendency of Maori verb to assume the form of a substantive 
 
 The finite verb may follow the oblique case 
 
 Predication performed by the possessive case 
 
 Compound tenses 
 
 Other circumstances which affect the time or voice of a verb 
 
 Verbs associated to qualify each other 
 
 Repetition of verbs 
 
 of other words 
 Passive Verbs, use of 
 Sometimes supplanted by the active 
 Neuter Verbs which assume the passive form. 
 
 CHAPTER XX. 
 
 OF THE PREPOSITIONS, ADVEKBS, AND CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 EXPLANATION OF ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 >K 
 
 adj. adjective. 
 
 adv. adverb. 
 
 n. noun. 
 
 verb. adj. verbalized adjective. 
 
 v. verb. 
 
 v. a. verb active. 
 
 vide S. denotes that further information will be found in the 
 Syntax. 
 
GRAMMAR OF THE NEW ZEALAND 
 
 LANGUAGE. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 OF THE PRONUNCIATION OF MAORI. 
 
 The letters of Maori are as follows : 
 
 A 
 
 E 
 
 H 
 
 I 
 
 K 
 
 M 
 
 N 
 
 O 
 
 P 
 
 R 
 
 T 
 
 U 
 
 w 
 
 NG 
 
 NAME. 
 
 in fall, fat. 
 a in acorn. 
 
 a as 
 
 e as 
 
 ha. 
 
 % as i in French or ee in sl^p. 
 
 ha. 
 
 ma. 
 
 na, 
 
 o. 
 
 pa. 
 
 TO. 
 til. 
 1(. 
 
 wa. 
 
 nga. 
 
 OF THE SOUNDS OF THE VOWELS. 
 
 A 
 
 Has three sounds ; the slender, somewhat broader, 
 and the full broad sound. 
 
 1. The slender ; as in hat, pat. 
 
 2. The somewhat broader ; as in mar, far, father 
 
 3. The full broad ; as in wall, hall, &c. 
 
 2 
 
PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 The following is a list of words classified under 
 these heads : 
 
 l. 
 ptu, to strike. 
 
 matua, a father, 
 marama, the moon. 
 trtki, to drag a canoe 
 
 in water. 
 matenga, death. 
 taringa, ear. 
 
 pakru, broken. 
 
 p^keke, hard, 
 tangata, a man. 
 tdhu, to burn. 
 
 2. 
 ptu, partition of 
 
 a house. 
 matua, fathers. 
 marama, light, 
 tki, take from the 
 
 fire. 
 matenga, head. 
 tfZringa, waiting 
 
 for. 
 pakarua, v. p. 
 
 broken. 
 p^keke, to creek. 
 
 tahuhu, a ridge- 
 pole. 
 
 3. 
 
 whana, to kick. 
 wahi, a place. 
 whaki, to confess. 
 
 ware, a plebeian. 
 
 tangata, men. 
 whare, a house. 
 
 The second and third heads differ but little from each 
 other, and it sometimes may be difficult to decide 
 under which of the two the sound should be classed. 
 
 The reader is requested to notice that the distinc- 
 tions above made are not founded so much on the 
 length of the sound as on the differences of the 
 sounds themselves. If the length of the sound be 
 considered, other classes (at least two) might easily 
 be established ; but the learner would, we fear, be 
 more perplexed than benefited by the addition. 
 
 The speaker should remember that in some com- 
 pound words the last syllable of the first word, if it 
 end in a, is pronounced strong ; e.g. 
 
 Patunga-poaka, place where pigs are killed] Ma- 
 hinga-kai, a cultivation ; Mata-pu, the lead of a gun, 
 a bullet ; Ta te tutua tu, the plebeian's manners. 
 
 Note. There are exceptions to this rule which it would be 
 well for the student of observation to notice. 
 
 In pronouncing such words as kata, mata, tata, the 
 speaker must be careful not to slur over the first a, 
 
PRONUNCIATION. 3 
 
 as if it were k^ta, m^ta, &c. It should be pronounced 
 clearly and distinctly. 
 
 JS 
 
 Is pronounced as a in bate, hate, &c, only not quite 
 so slow, or so broad. Perhaps the final e in the French 
 words cafe, f elicite, would be a closer resemblance ; 
 eg. koe, rea, re, kettf, ma^, ^nei, rere. 
 
 (2.) As e in poetical, there; e.g. tens,, renga-renga, 
 Jcete, rere. 
 
 Few sounds in Maori are more frequently mispronounced by 
 foreigners than e. Tohe, ngar<?, kumea, ho mai te waka, te 
 reinga, te rangi, rewera,, kom*o, have been all so carelessly pro- 
 nounced as to sound to the native ear as if spelt, tohi, ngari, 
 kumia, hoia mai ti waka, to reinga, to rangi, rewara, kororo. 
 The reader should also be careful not to give e the diphthongal 
 sound of ei ; as in ne, the interrogative particle, &c. 
 
 I is pronounced like the French i ; as ee in sleep, 
 green, &c; when distinctly and fully pronounced, it 
 imparts much melodiousness to the sentence; e.g. 
 arekt, kike, to chatter, &c. 
 
 In the following' it has a shorter sound : K2ki, 
 crowded; nuti, titi, &c. 
 
 N.B. The speaker should be careful not to confound i with 
 the Maori e ; as in such words as wakatoi, hoi, &c. 
 
 
 
 Has a long and a short sound a long ; as toto, to 
 drag. 
 
 A short ; as toto, blood. 
 
 N.B. We have no sound in Maori to correspond to the o in 
 not, hot, pot, &c. 
 
 u. 
 
 This sound is also uniform in kind, and always 
 corresponds to oo in book, &c. It sometimes, however, 
 
PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 experiences a more quick, sometimes a more slow 
 pronunciation. 
 
 The following table exhibits two variations, begin- 
 ning with the shorter : 
 
 1. 
 
 Htri, a knee. 
 
 tutu, same as tupakihi of 
 
 Ngapuhi. 
 kukti, a shell. 
 kuhu. 
 
 iltu, to pay. 
 
 2. 
 
 tutu, disobedient. 
 
 tutu (manu), a birdstand. 
 
 kiiku, a pigeon. 
 
 tiitua. 
 
 huna, 
 
 titu, to draw ivater. 
 
 In pronouncing w, the speaker will have to guard against 
 the error of those who prefix the aspirate when no aspirate is 
 admissable. According to them u, ntu, &c, are pronounced as 
 if spelt hu, hutu. 
 
 He will also have to beware of the more common and 
 stubborn error of giving u the dipthongal sound of u in cube, 
 tube, mute, &c. Tonu, ketu, tonutia, are, in this way, pro- 
 nounced as if spelt tomu, toniutia, ketiu. 
 
 U, again, is sometimes, by careless speakers, confounded 
 with o, and vice versa. Thus ihu, nose ; niho, tooth ; have 
 been erroneously pronounced as if spelt iho, nihu. 
 
 OF THE DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 This portion of Maori literature has been as yet 
 but little explored ; and as each person's notions will 
 vary with the acuteness of his ear, and the extent to 
 which his judgment has been exercised, we may be pre- 
 pared to expect a considerable discrepancy of opinion. 
 
 We shall therefore proceed with caution, and offer 
 only what may be most useful, and most necessary for 
 the student. 
 
 The field of discussion may be much limited if we 
 first define what we mean by the word " diphthong. " 
 
 The best definition we can find, and the one most 
 suited to the nature of the diphthong, is, we think, 
 
PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 that of Mr. Smith in Walker. "A diphthong," he 
 says, "I would define to be two simple vocal sounds 
 uttered by one and the same emission of breath, and 
 joined in such a manner that each loses a portion of 
 its natural length, but from the junction produceth a 
 compound sound equal in the time of pronouncing to 
 either of them taken separately, and so making still 
 but one syllable." 
 
 Following this definition, three tests for a diph- 
 thong suggest themselves 
 
 1. The emission of the two sounds by the same 
 breath. 
 
 2. Their amalgamation, or, more correctly, their 
 coalescing ; for each vowel in the Maori diphthong is 
 distinctly heard. 
 
 3. The abbreviation in the natural length of each 
 simple sound. 
 
 In applying these rules to the dipthongs, it will be 
 perhaps most prudent to divide them, under the pre- 
 sent imperfect state of our knowledge, into two 
 classes: 1. The certain, or those of the diphthongal 
 character of which there can be but little question. 
 2. The doubtful, or those upon which inquirers may 
 be likely to entertain different opinions. 
 
 The diphthongs which we consider certain are as 
 follows : 
 
 aa, ae, ai, ao, au, ee, ei, ii, oo, ou, uu. 
 
 On these we will offer a few remarks. 
 
 Those diphthongs which are formed by a double 
 letter, such as aa, are distinguished by a stronger and 
 fuller sound ; as in Wakaaro, rapwwtu, &c. 
 
 AE 
 
 Is a sound for which ifc is difficult to find a parallel 
 in English, and which most speakers confound with ai 
 in such words as waewae, waeroa, paewae, &c. 
 
b PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 The English aye comes perhaps closer to it. It must 
 be pronounced broad and open, and care must be taken 
 to keep out the squeezed sound of the i. 
 
 AI 
 
 May be well represented by the i in shine. 
 
 AO 
 
 Has no representative in English that we are aware of. 
 In pronouncing it, the speaker must be careful to let 
 the o be distinctly, but not too prominently, heard; 
 and considerable care will be required to keep it dis- 
 tinct from au in the following words, as otawhao, 
 whawhao, tao, hao, &c; neither, again, must the 
 speaker divide the diphthong into two syllables, as 
 some speakers do otaota, &c. 
 
 AU 
 
 May be pronounced like ou in drought, trout, pound, 
 &c. 
 
 EI 
 
 May be represented by the at in hail, pail, &c. Care 
 must be taken not to suppress altogether the i, as is 
 sometimes done in such words as ten^i, penei, &c. 
 
 OU 
 
 Is a sound of some difficulty. There is no sound that 
 we are aware of in the English language that exactly 
 corresponds to it. Low, sow, mow, &c, may be made 
 to resemble it, by pronouncing them slowly, and letting 
 the sound die away into u. 
 
 Most foreigners are apt to pronounce it as a simple o. The 
 first syllable of koutou is one of very difficult pronunciation. 
 Without great care it will be variously pronounced, as if koitou, 
 kotou, or kutu. 
 
 By not attending to these distinctions the speaker will often 
 lose the benefit of a good thought. A speaker, guarding his 
 
PRONUNCIATION". 7 
 
 hearers against spiritual temptations, borrowed his illustrations 
 from apoukaka (the perch for the parrot, by which it is caught), 
 telling them that Satan often presents poukakas to attract them 
 to ruin ; unfortunately, however, instead of pouk&ka, he used 
 pok&ko, a squall of wind and rain, and only expressed his point 
 by exciting their risibility. 
 
 The doubtful class of diphthongs are mau (as in 
 mau, for thee, tau, thy) ai (as in maia, brave), ea, eo, eu, 
 io, iu. 
 
 On these we do not wish at present to make many observa- 
 tions. We believe that there is a considerable difference 
 amongst Maori speakers respecting them. Our own idea is that 
 there may be a few occasions on which some might be considered 
 diphthongs ; and that those occasions are, the position of the 
 syllable, whether at the end of the word or elsewhere, as also 
 whether it come under the influence of the accent. 
 
 We cannot dismiss this subject without mentioning two par- 
 ticulars, very necessary to be remembered by all who wish to 
 attain to an accurate pronunciation of Maori. First, as it is in 
 English, every sentence is to be pronounced as if one word. 
 2. Homogeneous vowels will, when they meet, almost always 
 run into a diphthong. 
 
 The following sentence, kola i whiriwhiria ai e ia to ratou 
 uri, would be thus pronounced by a native : koiai-whiri-whiria- 
 eia-to-ratouri. Koia ia i riri ai would run koiai-aiririai. 
 
 This same subject of homogeneous vowels coalescing into 
 diphthongs is one which has not received the attention it merits. 
 
 OF THE CONSONANTS. 
 
 This is the same as the English h. 
 
 It is not, however, known on the western coast of 
 New Zealand, to the southward of Mokau, in the dis- 
 trict of Taranaki. Its place is supplied by a curious 
 stammer or jerk of the voice. A gentle sibilancy 
 accompanies its pronunciation amongst Ngapuhi, 
 which some speakers erroneously confound with sh. 
 
8 PUOMJNCIATION. 
 
 K. 
 
 K has the sound of the English h ; as in kill, &c. 
 
 M, N, P. 
 M, N, P, have the same sound as in English. 
 
 R. 
 
 R has two sounds : ( 1 ) rough ; as in rain, river, 
 &c; e.g., kahore, rorea, roro, roto. 
 
 (2) The second is more soft, and is formed by a 
 gentle jar of the tongue against the palate ; so gentle, 
 indeed, is the vibration that most foreigners pronounce 
 it like d or I, as in raro, ruru, rimu, pouani, pari, 
 muri, mariri, koiri, korikori, kouru, mam. 
 
 This is a letter which few Europeans pronounce cor- 
 rectly. It is not pronounced like the t in temper, tea, 
 &c; but rather like the sharp th of apa^Ay, sympaMy, 
 AtfAens, apo^Aecary. Those who watch a native's 
 tongue while pronouncing this letter, will find that the 
 rule for attaining this sound is, to apply the tongue, 
 not to the root, but to the top of the teeth, and hardly 
 emit a. 
 
 W 
 
 Has two sounds one simple, as that in wind, &c. ; 
 e.g., wai, water; waka, a canoe; ware, a plebeian. 
 
 2. An aspirated w, as in when, where, &c. ; whai, 
 follow ; whare, a house, &c. 
 
 The speaker should be careful in uttering this sound 
 not to separate the n from the g, as is sometimes done 
 by foreigners. The n and g intimately coalesce, and 
 those who have learned to pronounce the French encore 
 will find no difficulty in catching it. The following 
 rule will, we trust, help the beginner : 
 
PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 9 
 
 Press the middle of the tongue to the roof of the 
 mouth, near the throat, and simultaneously relax the 
 pressure, and pronounce na. Of course care must be 
 taken that the tip of the tongue does not touch the 
 palate.* 
 
 Following is a table setting forth a few of the variations in 
 pronunciation of the leading dialects of New Zealand. 
 
 It will be observed that the name of a place is employed to 
 denote the dialect for which that place and ics vicinity are 
 remarkable. 
 
 Ngapuhi. 
 
 Waikato. 
 
 East Cape 
 
 Rotorua. 
 
 Taupo. 
 
 Taranaki. 
 
 Keri 
 
 Keri 
 
 
 Kari 
 
 Kari 
 
 Kari 
 
 Tatou 
 
 Tatou 
 
 Tatau 
 
 Tatau 
 
 Tatou and 
 Tatau 
 
 Tatou 
 
 Matou 
 
 Matou 
 
 Matau 
 
 Matau 
 
 Matou and 
 Matau 
 
 Matou 
 
 Ratou 
 
 Ratou 
 
 Ratau 
 
 Ratau 
 
 Ratou and 
 Ratau 
 
 Ratou 
 
 Koro&Korua 
 
 Korua 
 
 
 
 
 
 Koutou 
 
 Koutou 
 
 Koutau 
 
 Koutau 
 
 Koutou & 
 
 Koutou 
 
 Taua or Tao 
 
 Taua 
 
 Taua 
 
 Taua 
 
 [Koutau 
 
 
 Maua or Mao 
 
 Maua 
 
 Maua 
 
 Maua 
 
 
 
 Raua or Rao 
 
 Raua 
 
 Raua 
 
 Roua 
 
 
 
 Hei 
 
 Hei 
 
 Hai 
 
 Hai 
 
 Hai & Hei 
 
 Ei 
 
 Kei 
 
 Kei 
 
 Kai 
 
 Kai 
 
 Kai & Kei 
 
 Kei 
 
 Tutei 
 
 Tutai 
 
 Tutai 
 
 Tutai 
 
 Tutai 
 
 Tutei 
 
 Wha 
 
 
 
 
 
 VVa 
 
 Maoa 
 
 Maia 
 
 
 
 Maoa 
 
 Maia & 
 Maoa 
 
 Hohou 
 
 Whawhau 
 
 
 
 Hohou and 
 Whawhua 
 
 O-ou 
 
 Teina 
 
 Teina 
 
 Taina 
 
 Taina 
 
 Teina 
 
 Teina 
 
 Tarai 
 
 Tarai 
 
 
 Tarei 
 
 Tarei 
 
 Tarai 
 
 Heoi 
 
 Heoti 
 
 
 
 Heoti 
 
 Eoi and 
 Eoti 
 
 Kua 
 
 Kua 
 
 
 Koua 
 
 Kua&Koua 
 
 Ku 
 
 Kia 
 
 Kia 
 
 Kia 
 
 Kia 
 
 Kia 
 
 Ki 
 
 Horo 
 
 Hohoro 
 
 
 
 
 O-oro 
 
 Topa 
 
 Tao 
 
 
 
 Tao 
 
 Tao 
 
 Roa 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ro 
 
 Tonu 
 
 Tonu 
 
 Tou 
 
 
 
 
 See also the letters ng and h. 
 
 * This sound is not known in the Bay of Plenty, 
 by a simple w, further southward by k. 
 
 Its place is supplied 
 
10 OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 1. The articles in Maori are as follows : 
 (a) The definite article te and its plural nga ; e.g. 
 
 te tangata, the man. 
 nga tangata, the men. 
 
 (#) The indefinite articles he, tetahi, and its plural 
 etahi ; e.g. 
 
 Sing, he maripi, a knife. 
 
 Plur. he maripi ena ? are those knives ? 
 
 te tahi, maripi, a knife. 
 
 e tahi maripi, some knives. 
 
 (c) The arthritic particles a and ko ; e.g. 
 
 a Hone, John. 
 ko koe, you. 
 
 2. Te is not so uniformly definite as the English 
 the ; being sometimes used 
 
 (a) Where no article would be employed in English, 
 i.e. in cases where the noun is taken in its widest 
 sense ; e.g. 
 
 I ma te kaipuke, went by ship. 
 He kino te tutu, disobedience is sinful. 
 Ko te rangi me te wenua e pahemo, heaven and 
 earth shall pass away. 
 
 (b) Sometimes it is employed instead of the English 
 a; e.g. 
 
 He mea kaha te hoiho, a horse is a strong thing. 
 E kore te tangata tika e wehi i te mate, a virtuous 
 man will not fear death. 
 
OF THE ARTICLE. 11 
 
 (c) Sometimes it is used instead of the pronoun 
 some ; e.g. 
 
 Kei tahaetia e te tangata, lest it should be stolen by 
 some person ; na te tangata noa atu, by some 
 person or other. 
 
 (d) It is employed for many other purposes which 
 the English the does not recognise. We shall only 
 mention the following : 
 
 Te tini o te kaipuke, how many ships there are ! 
 
 Note. It has been asserted that te is sometimes used in the 
 plural number, as in the preceding example, " te kaipuke," 
 and in the following 1 te tini o te tangata, many men ; ka reka 
 te pititi, peaches are sweet. 
 
 We are more inclined to think that we have in theee exam- 
 ples the operation of a figure of frequent occurrence in Maori, 
 viz., synecdoche, and that one of a class is made to represent a 
 whole class. 
 
 Expressions of this kind are common in English without 
 involving the plural number of the article ; e.g. the fruit of the 
 tree, a great many, a few men, c. Bishop Lowth's remarks on 
 these instances are quite to the point : 
 
 1 ' The reason of it (he says) is manifest from the effect which 
 the article has in these phrases ; it means a small or great 
 number, collectively taken, and therefore gives the idea of a 
 whole, that is, of unity. Thus likewise, a hundred, a thousand 
 is one whole number, an aggregate of many collectively taken ; 
 and, therefore, still retains the article a, though joined as an 
 adjective to a plural substantive ; as, a hundred years.' 1 '' 
 
 (<?) Lastly, te is sometimes employed before proper 
 names ; e.g. 
 
 Te Puriri, Te Uira. 
 
 Note 1. To define the rule by which the article is prefixed 
 or omitted before proper names is a work of some difficulty, 
 usage being very irregular. 
 
 Note 2. Sometimes te is blended with o into one word ; as 
 in the following example : ki to Hone whare, to the house of 
 John, instead of ki te whare o Hone. 
 
 Note 3. The student should be careful, in speaking, to 
 distinguish between the article te and the negative particle te. 
 
12 OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 The latter should always be pronounced more distinctly and 
 forcibly than the article. 
 
 3. JVga may with strict propriet}' be called the 
 plural of the definite article. There are a few 
 exceptions, or, rather, slight variations, which we do 
 not think it necessary to mention. 
 
 4. He varies in some respects in its uses from the 
 English a. 
 
 (a) It is used sometimes where no article would be 
 employed in English ; e.g. 
 
 A, ho atu ana e ratou he moni ki a ia, and they 
 gave him money. 
 
 ih) It is occasionally used in the same sense as some 
 in English ; e.g. 
 
 Kawea he wai, fetch some water. 
 
 (c) It is used in the plural number ; e.g. 
 
 He uwha kau aku poaka, my pigs are all females. 
 He tini oku kainga, my farms are many. 
 
 5. A great many uses of the indefinite article are 
 shared by he with te tahi. We shall mention here a 
 few of them : 
 
 Ho mai te tahi maripi, give me a knife. 
 Tahuna mai te tahi rama, kindle a light. 
 
 N.B. Te tahi exactly corresponds with the definition given 
 by Bishop Lowth of the English articles. "It determines it 
 (the thing spoken of) to be one single thing of the kind, leaving 
 it still uncertain which." A similar use of the numeral one we 
 find in French, sometimes in Hebrew, and more than once in 
 the New Testament (vide Matt. xxi. 19, and Markxiv. 51). 
 
 We need not look abroad for parallel instances ; our indefinite 
 article an being, as every etymologist is aware, the Saxon article 
 which signifies one. 
 
 (h) Etahi may be considered as corresponding to 
 the partitive article des of the French. It determines 
 
OF THE AKTICLE. 13 
 
 the things spoken of to be any number of things of 
 the kind, leaving it uncertain how many, or which of 
 the things they are. It closely resembles the adjective 
 some of English, and we enumerate it here among 
 the articles because it only differs from te tahi (which 
 is clearly an article) in being its plural ; e.g. 
 
 Maku e tahi ika, give me some fish. 
 
 6. A % is a regular attendant on the personal 
 pronouns ; e.g. 
 
 a koe, you ; ki a ia, to him. 
 
 (b) It is also the article by which the names of 
 individuals and tribes are always preceded ; e.g. 
 
 a Hone, kei a Hone, with John ; i a Ngapuhi. 
 
 Note 1. When the particle ko is prefixed to either the 
 proper name or the pronoun, a is omitted ; e.g. 
 
 ko Hone, ko ia. 
 
 (2.) It is also omitted after the prepositions e, ma, mo, no, 
 na, o, a. The prepositions with which it is retained are i, ki, 
 kei, and their compounds i runga i, &c. ; e.g. 
 
 i runga i a Hone, above John. 
 
 Note 2. Europeans who have not made the language a 
 study, often very incorrectly substitute e for a before a proper 
 
 *Some, perhaps, may object to our regarding a as an article, and may 
 remind us of the definition that an article is "a word prefixed to substan- 
 tives to point them out, and show how far their signification extends." 
 This, however, is to make rules precede investigation, and our reply is, 
 that if Bishop Lowth, from whom this definition is derived, had been 
 writing on the Greek article, he would, most probably, have never given 
 such a definition. Every scholar is aware of the disputes that have been 
 agitated among the learned respecting the uses of this article, and that 
 some have even maintained "that its use is guided by no rule at all." 
 The fact is, every language has its peculiarities, and it would be absurd 
 to maintain that because any given part of speech has certain powers in 
 one language, it must have the same in another. 
 
 We denominate thjs article arthritic, because it is, as the Greeks 
 would say, an arthron, a limb of the word to which it is prefixed, though 
 it in no way defines the extent of its signification ; unless, perhaps, we 
 consider that, by its denoting the word to be either a pronoun, a proper 
 name, &c, it thus, in a certain measure, restricts its application, and 
 thus accords with the definition which some writers would give of the 
 article, viz., "an index to the noun." 
 
14 OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 name ; e.g. they will say, kei hea e te Warn ? where is te Warn ? 
 and, again, kua tae mai e JSfanaia Nanaia has arrived. E, as we 
 shall show hereafter, is the sign of the vocative case. A is 
 omitted before such words as the following, kei te Pakeha, kei 
 nga Maori, &c. 
 
 Note 3. A is sometimes in Waikato prefixed to appellatives; 
 e.g. ki a tuahangata, a papa, a kara. 
 
 (c) A is also prefixed to the names of places, and to 
 prepositions, and adverbs which have assumed the form 
 of substantives, when in the nominative case ; e.g. 
 
 Kua horo a Pukerangiora, Puherangiora (the 
 fort) has been stormed. Kua tukua atu e ahau 
 a Whangarei mo Hone, I have given Whangarei 
 to John. Kua kainga a runga o nga puka nei, 
 the tops of the cabbages have been eaten off. 
 
 A hea ? what place ? A Eangitoto. 
 
 Note. Sometimes a is prefixed to the name of the place 
 when the people of the place, and not the place itself, are 
 intended ; e.g. ka mate i a Waikato, will be killed by Waikato. 
 
 Some speakers are often guilty of solecisms from not 
 remembering that a is not prefixed to any of the oblique cases 
 of the names of places. Thus we heard some old residents in 
 the land say, Haere ki a Pokuru Go to Pokuru. Haere ki a 
 Waitemata Go to Waitemata. According to this form, Pokuru 
 and Waitemata are not places, but persons. 
 
 (d) A is always prefixed to any inanimate thing to 
 which a name has been given i.e. to trees, canoes, 
 ships, boats, meres* guns, &c. ; e.g. 
 
 Kei te tua i a Puhaia, he is cutting down (the 
 tree) Ruhaia. E waihape ana a Karapaina, 
 Columbine is tacking. Mo to tahaetanga i a 
 Pahikoura, for your having stolen (the mere*) 
 Pahikoura. 
 
 *The " mere " is a native weapon for war made of the axe stone. It is 
 an article of great value, and descends from father to son as an oha, an 
 heirloom in the tribe. 
 
OF THE ARTICLE. 15 
 
 I toa ai a Hongi i whakawirinaki ia ki tana pu 
 ki a Tanumia. Hongi was brave because he trusted 
 in his gun Tanumia. 
 
 Note 1. Stars also come under the operation of this rule, 
 e.g. Ko wai tena whetu i runga i a Tawera ? ivhat star is that 
 above Tawera ?* 
 
 Kua ara a Matariki,f Matariki has made his appearance. 
 
 Houses, caves, and such like are regulated by rule (c) ; e.g. 
 Heoi ano nga tangata kei a Peru o Waikato, all the people 
 
 have mustered off to Puruowaikato Whereowhereo' *s house on 
 
 the Waikato river. 
 Kowai hei whakahua i ta tatou whangai hau ? 
 I a wai ; i a Tu. 
 Ko hea te haua mai na P ko Puhimatarengfa, &c. 
 
 'o' 
 
 2. The following sentences are incorrect. 
 
 E haere mai ana te Mihaia. 
 Kua mate te Karaiti. 
 
 N.B. The speaker should distinguish between the article 
 and the preposition a, as in the following sentence : 
 
 Ekore ahau e kai i a nga taurekareka, I will not eat {the food) 
 of the slaves. 
 
 The preposition a in these ellipitical sentences should always 
 be pronounced peculiarly strong. 
 
 He should also note the following: 
 
 Kia mea (with short a) is " to do." 
 
 Ki a mea (with long a) is to such an one, to our friend, or, in 
 common parlance (give it), to what do you call him. 
 
 For Ko (see Syntax, chap, xiv.) 
 
 * Tawera is the morning star. 
 
 t This star makes his appearance about the month of June, in the 
 first month of the New Zealnnder, and creates an important epoch in his 
 agricultural operations 
 
16 OF THE NOUNS. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 OF THE NOUNS. 
 
 CLASSES OE NOUNS IN RESPECT TO ORIGIN. 
 
 Nouns in Maori may be comprised under three 
 classes primitive, derivative, and verbal* 
 
 (a) Nouns primitive are those which designate 
 animals, plants, numbers, members of the animal body, 
 some of the great objects of the natural world. 
 
 N.B. It is often impossible to distinguish between primitive 
 and derivative nouns. 
 
 (b) Nouns derivative, which are altogether the most 
 numerous, comprise 
 
 (1.) Nouns derived from verbs, i.e. the verb, in its 
 simple form, used as a noun ; e.g. 
 
 He noho noa iho taku, it is a simple sitting of 
 
 mine ; I have no fixed object in stopping (here). 
 He haere pai to haere ? Is your going a good 
 going, i.e., are you going with good intent ? 
 
 (2.) Nouns derived from adjectives; e.g. 
 
 He aha te pai o tena mea ? ivhat is the ivorth of 
 
 that thing ? 
 Iveihea te pakaru ? where is the broken place ? 
 
 (3.) Nouns derived from adverbs and prepositions ; 
 e.g. 
 
 * We are aware that verbal nouns should properly have been classed 
 under derivative ; but as we shall often have to speak of them as a distinct 
 class, and as, moreover, they closely resemble in some respects the par- 
 ticipial form of the verb, and are very frequently used instead of the finite 
 verb itself, we have consulted our convenience in thus distinguishing 
 them. 
 
OF THE NOUNS. 17 
 
 He kore rawa, it is nil. 
 
 Engari a reira e pai ana, there (or that place) is 
 
 better, 
 Kua ki a roto, the inside is full. 
 Parua a tua, coat the other side (with raupo). 
 
 (4.) Compound Words. These are always formed by 
 two words placed in immediate juxtaposition, with- 
 out any elision of either ; e.g. 
 
 Hia kai (desire food), hunger ; mate moe [craving 
 sleep), sleepiness ; hoa riri (angry friend), enemy ; 
 mahi atawhai (cherishing act, fyc), a cherishing, 
 Sfc. ; kai whakaako (one that teaches), a teacher ; 
 kai whakamarie (one that pacifies), a pacifier ; 
 tangata atua, a man having a god; tangata 
 pakeha, a man having a European to live with him ; 
 he hunga kianga, a people having a place to reside 
 on; ahu taonga (bent on gain), avariciousness ; ahu 
 whenua (having the mind occupied with the earth), 
 industriousness, or peaceableness ; whenua ranga- 
 tira (a noble land, not disturbed by invasions) peace ; 
 houhanga rongo, making peace ; ngakau whaka- 
 kake, pride ; he whare kore (a no house), home- 
 lessness ; he horoi kore (a no soap), soaplessness ; 
 whakaaro kore, thoughtlessness, fyc. 
 
 (c) Verbal nouns are well worthy the attention of 
 the critical student. They are of yery extensive uses in 
 Maori, and a proper introduction of them will give 
 animation and elegance to the sentence. The rules 
 for their formation will be found hereafter. See 
 Verbs. 
 
 They are generally employed to denote time, place, 
 object, means, or some accompaniment on, or relation of, 
 the act or quality of the ground form. Other uses of 
 them will be mentioned in the Syntax. 
 
 3 
 
18 OF THE NOUNS. 
 
 To set forth the various uses of the verbal noun 
 here would carry us beyond our limits. We shall, 
 therefore, only give a few examples sufficient, how- 
 ever, we trust, to lead the critical student into more 
 extensive inquiry : 
 
 Ko tona moenga tena, that is tvher e he slept. 
 
 Te pumautanga o te whakaaro, the full assurance 
 
 of hope ; te whakangarungarunga o te wai, the 
 
 troubling of the water. 
 Te peheatenga i meatia ai, the manner in ivhich it 
 
 teas done. 
 Te patunga poaka, the place where the pigs are 
 
 hilled. 
 Kahore aku kete kumara hei whakahokinga atu 
 
 mo to puka, I have no basket of kumara with 
 
 which to send back (i.e. to pay for the loan of) 
 
 your spade. 
 I te hanganga o te ao, when the world was made. 
 I ana inoinga, in his prayers {i.e. when he 
 
 prayed.) 
 Ko tona kiteatanga tenei, this is the opportunity 
 
 for looking for, or seeing it. 
 To tatou nuinga, the rest of our party. 
 I taku oranga, while I live. 
 
 Note. Instances will sometimes occur in which the simple 
 root, or the verbal form, may be indifferently used in the 
 sentence. The critical student, however, will generally be able 
 to see the reason ; e.g. te here o tona hu, the thong of his shoe ; 
 te herenga o tona hu, the holes, e. by which the thong is 
 fastened. 
 
 Proper Names should perhaps have been classed 
 under the head of derivative nouns. 
 
 They are epithets arbitrarily assumed, as among 
 the Hebrews, from some circumstance, quality, act, or 
 thing. Sometimes they are simple ; e.g. ko te Tawa, 
 Tawa (a tree). Sometimes compound; e.g. Tangikai, 
 cry for food. They are generally known by a prefixed ; 
 when a is not prefixed, by the context. 
 
OF THE NOUNS. 
 
 19 
 
 Note. Sometimes we meet with English, appellatives 
 employed as appellatives in Maori, but with the form peculiar 
 to proper names; e.g. a mata, the mistress; a pepi, the baby; 
 a te kawana, the governor. These, however, must be regarded 
 as solecisms, and as in no way supported by Maori analogy.* 
 
 We sometimes also meet with a Maori proper name employed 
 as an appellative ; i.e. if an individual of a particular 
 district has been remarkable for any quality, his name will 
 often be predicated of any other in whom the same feature 
 of character is discernible thus, Ropeti, of Waikato, was 
 remarkable for making a great show of hospitality ; hence, 
 to any person else who has been detected acting in a similar 
 way, it will be said, Ko Kopeti, there is Ropeti. 
 
 As all these terms are necessarily limited in their use to a 
 particular district, we need not notice them further. 
 
 OF GENDER, NUMBER, AND CASE. 
 
 Maori, as we may premise, admits of no such. 
 thing as declension by inflection, i.e. by a variation 
 of the ground form. All the relations it is capable 
 of expressing are denoted by words, or particles, pre- 
 fixed or post-fixed to the noun. 
 
 Gender of Nouns. Distinctions of gender are 
 but seldom recognised in Maori. Only two are ever 
 noticed viz., the masculine and feminine. These are 
 always expressed by different words ; e.g. 
 
 MALE. 
 
 Matua \ 
 
 or ^father. 
 Papa ) 
 Tamaiti J 
 
 or > son. 
 
 Tamaroa ) 
 Tungane, brother of a female. 
 
 FEMALE. 
 
 Whaea, mother. 
 
 Tamahine ) 
 
 or > daughter. 
 
 Kotiro ) 
 Tuahine, sister of a man. 
 
 * It is true that we have mentioned (pages 14 and 15) a few cases which 
 might seem to warrant such a use. But those clearly belong to a 
 different class. 
 
20 
 
 OF THE NOUNS. 
 
 MALE. 
 Autane, brother-in-law of a 
 
 female. 
 Tangata, man. 
 Koroheke, old man. 
 Tourahi and Toa, male of 
 
 brute animals. 
 Tane, a male, mostly of the 
 human species. 
 
 FEMALE. 
 
 Auwahine, sister-in-law of the 
 
 man, 
 Wahine, woman. 
 Ruruhi, old woman. 
 Uwha, female of brutes. 
 
 Wahine, female. 
 
 In salutation, the sex of the person is almost always 
 denoted by the address ; e.g. 
 
 To the man. 
 
 E hoa, friend ! 
 
 E pa, 
 
 E mara, 
 
 E koro, 
 
 E kara, 
 
 ETa, 
 
 EHika, 
 
 Ekui 
 Etai 
 Eko 
 E Hine 
 
 To the female. 
 
 to the married woman. 
 
 to the girl. 
 
 Note 1. It should, however, be noted that these modes of 
 address will vary in different districts. Thus, in Waikato, E 
 Tai and E ho are often addressed to the male, and E fati to 
 the girl ; again, also, tane and wahine will be often found 
 applied to the brute creation, and tourahi, in Waikato, is most 
 frequently applied to the gelding. 
 
 Note 2. The speaker should notice that the relationship of 
 individuals of the same sex is designated by the same terms as 
 the corresponding ones of the opposite sex ; e.g. 
 
 John's 
 elder brother is Tuakana. 
 younger brother teina. 
 brother-in-law taokete. 
 
 Mary's 
 elder sister is Tuakana. 
 
 younger sister teina. 
 sister-in-law taokete. 
 
 The distinction of sex in the other branches is 
 generally designated by tane and wahine post-fixed to 
 the relation ; e.g. 
 
 Hunaongo wahine, daughter-in-law. 
 Hungawai tane, father-in-law. 
 
OF THE NOUNS. 21 
 
 Number. Substantives in Maori have two numbers, 
 singular and plural. 
 
 The singular is known by the singular articles 
 te and tetahi, or by one of the singular pronouns 
 connected with the noun ; e.g. 
 
 Te whare o Hone, the house of John, 
 Toku paraikete, my blanket. 
 
 The plural is known by (1) nga, e tahi, or (2) one of 
 the plural or dual pronouns preceding the noun ; e g. 
 
 nga wahine, the women, 
 dku tupuna, my forefathers. 
 
 (3.) Sometimes the plural is designated by 0, with- 
 out te or nga preceding the noun ; e.g. 
 
 Kei o Hone m^tua pea, ivith Johrfs uncles perhaps. 
 
 (4.) In a few cases we meet with an alteration in 
 the ground form ; eg. 
 
 Tamaiti, son ; Tamariki, sons, or children. 
 
 (5.) In some trisyllables the first syllable of the 
 plural is pronounced long ; as in matua, tupuna, 
 wahine, tangata. 
 
 Note. Examples of these two latter heads are not of 
 frequent occurrence. 
 
 (6.) We frequently meet with ma joined to the 
 proper name, in a sense corresponding to hoi amphi, 
 and hoi peri in Greek, to denote the person and his 
 company; e.g. 
 
 Kei a Kukutai ma y with Kukutai and his party. 
 
 (7.) Sometimes also ma is in the same sense post- 
 fixed to appellatives ; e.g. 
 
 E mara ma ! E hoa ma ! E ko ma ! 
 
22 OF THE NOUNS. 
 
 (8.) Sometimes an act oft repeated, or many things 
 of the same kind, are denoted by a reduplication of 
 one or more syllables ; e.g. 
 
 Kakata, a frequent laughing. 
 Mamahi, over-work. 
 Kimokimo, a winking of the eyes. 
 
 Case. The distinction of case in Maori is exceedingly 
 simple. As it is not the character of the language to decline 
 either nouns or adjectives by a variation of the termination, it 
 is evident that, in this respect, Maori is altogether different 
 from Greek and Latin. Are we, then, to adopt the cases that 
 those languages so clearly need ? "We are aware that some 
 contend for them. But we are also assured that their adoption 
 would be, not only useless, but often exceedingly perplexing. 
 
 It is true that prepositions may be found in Maori, as well 
 as in English, that correspond with the cases that are to be 
 found in those languages. But that, we submit, is not the 
 question. Our business, we conceive, should be to inquire how 
 the dependence of words on each other is denoted in Maori, 
 and then look out for a system that will meet, not a few 
 selected cases, but all the various possible conditions. 
 
 Now, in Maori the different connections and relations of one 
 thing to another are denoted by prepositions ; there are 
 upwards of twenty prepositions ; and these are capable of 
 being much increased in number by combination with each 
 other ; all having distinct meanings, different relations, and 
 therefore distinct cases. Are all these, then, to be reduced to 
 the six cases of Latin ? Those who please may make the 
 experiment with the following ; Kei runga i te pouaka ; kei te 
 kainga ; ho atu ki a ia ; me titiro atu ki a ia ; patua ia ki te 
 rakau ; hei tua i te whare, &c. 
 
 The simple and comprehensive cases of Murray's English 
 Grammar seem, therefore, the best adapted for Maori, though 
 we will confess that our own judgment is against allowing any 
 possessive case to Maori. 
 
 In English, it is true, that case may be recognized ; because 
 the ground form undergoes a change to denote it. Even in 
 Hebrew, something analogous also might be admitted. But 
 in Maori the possessive case is expressed, like all the other 
 oblique cases, by a preposition. It may, indeed, be said that 
 in the pronouns we find a possessive formed by inflection. 
 But this might justly be questioned : for it is very probable 
 that nohu and naku are compounds of no oku and na aku, and, 
 when a native speaks slowly, it may be observed that he 
 pronounces those words as if so spelt. 
 
OF THE KOUNS. 23 
 
 1. What is called the accusative case in Latin is 
 most frequently denoted by t. This particle is 
 different from the preposition *, and is only employed 
 to denote the passing on of the action of the verb to 
 the noun; e.g. Ko wai hei keri i te mara? who is to 
 dig the field? Vide Prepositions (i), chap. viii. 
 
 2. The vocative case is always denoted by e; e.g. 
 E Hone ! John ! 
 
 CHAPTEE IV. 
 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 Maori adjectives have no peculiar or appropriate 
 form. They know no distinction of gender, number, 
 case, or comparison. 
 
 In common with substantives, adjectives admit 
 often of reduplication to denote repetition, or many 
 things of the same hind, &c. vide chap, iii., 8, page 
 22 eg. 
 
 Mahi kakata a frequent laughing. 
 
 He rakau kikino kau they are all had trees. 
 
 Note. Comparison in Maori is formed by periphrasis, for 
 which vide Syntax. 
 
24 OF THE NUMERALS. 
 
 CHAPTER Y. 
 OF THE NUMERALS. 
 
 Numerals in Maori abound in distinctions that are 
 not to be met with in other languages. 
 
 Tahi, one, has sometimes a form peculiar to itself, 
 being prefixed by Jco. All between tahi and tekau 
 may be prefixed by e. All the simple numbers i.e. 
 all less than ten will, when preceding the higher 
 numbers, take their ordinary prefixes ; e.g. 
 
 E rua, two e rua rau, two hundred. 
 
 Ka toru, three ka toru nga rau, three hundred, 
 
 or it is 300. 
 Kia wha, let it be four ; kia wha mano, let it 
 
 be four thousand, &c. 
 E rima, it is five ka rima mano, five thousand, &c. 
 Ka rima tekau, fifty, &c, &c. i.e. I have reached 
 
 fifty- 
 
 Numbers between ten and twenty are expressed by 
 ten and unit ; e.g. 
 
 E ono six ; tekau ma ono (ten and six) sixteen. 
 E whitu seven ; tekau ma whitu seventeen. 
 
 Twenty, and all numbers between twenty and a 
 hundred, may be expressed in two ways : 
 
 1st (which is now the more general), by a unit 
 preceding ten; e.g. e ono tekau, (six tens), sixty; ka 
 iwa tekau, ninety, &c. 
 
 2ndly, by hoho prefixed to the unit; e.g. hokorua, 
 twenty. 
 
OF THE NUMERALS. 25 
 
 "Note. The Maori mode of counting has always, heretofore, 
 been by pairs ; thus, hokorua, twenty, stands for twenty pair, 
 i.e. forty, and so on. When they wish it to be understood 
 singly, they post-fix taki-taki to the numeral adjective; e.g. 
 hokorua taki-taki, twenty. Sometimes topu or pu is postfixed 
 to make it more clear that the double of the number is intended ; 
 e.g. e waru topu {eight doubled), sixteen. 
 
 Ngahuru, with Ngapuhi, denotes ten, and tekau, eleven. In 
 the central part of the island, as far as Taupo, ngahuru and 
 tekau represent, both of them, ten. 
 
 In expressing a sum of tens and units, the smaller 
 number follows ten or its multiple, and is connected 
 with it by the numeral conjunction ma ; e.g. thirty -four 
 is denoted by " e toru tekau ma wha." 
 
 In expressing a sum of hundreds, with tens and units, 
 the tens are postfixed to the hundreds without a ma 
 intervening; e.g. 136 is expressed by "ko tahi rau, e 
 toru tekau, ma ono. ,, 
 
 A sum of thousands, hundreds, tens, and units is ex- 
 pressed in the same way, the particle ma only inter- 
 vening between the ten and the unit ; e.g. 1136 is 
 expressed by "ko tahi mano, ko tahi rau, e toru 
 tekau, ma ono." 
 
 Note. It should be here noticed that this is the new mode of 
 reckoning brought in by Europeans, and now fast spreading 
 over the land. The old mode is not so convenient in calcula- 
 tion, but it is often heard ; 240 would, according to it, be thus 
 expressed, Ko tahi rau ma rua, literally one hundred and two. 
 Two here stands for (twice ten) twenty doubled. 
 
 250 would run thus : Ko tahi rau ma rua pu tautahi, one 
 hundred and two double, and a tautahi, an odd one. 
 
 4,900 would run thus : E rua mano mo wha, hokorima te 
 tuma, two thousand, four hundred double ; fifty double is the tuma, 
 the excess. 
 
 For all beyond a thousand there is, we suspect, a consider- 
 able diversity in the nomenclature of different tribes. In 
 Waikato and Taupo 10,000 double (i.e. 20,000 according to our 
 reckoning) would be a tini ; ten tini (i.e. 100,000 double) would 
 be indifferently called ngera, rea, hea. All beyond that would 
 be denominated by a tini makehua, a tuaururi whaioio (or maioio), 
 tini whakarere, &c. 
 
26 OF THE NUMERALS. 
 
 For denoting a number of persons less than ten, toko 
 is generally prefixed to the numeral ; e.g. 
 
 Tokowhitu tatou, we are seven in number. 
 
 For denoting distribution, tataki is prefixed to the 
 numeral : kia tataki rua pu nga utu i te tangata, let 
 each man have four payments. 
 
 Note. Tataki prefixed does not always denote distribution ; 
 e.g. If a tataki-hia nga whakato o ta koutou mara ? Sow 
 many baskets {are these) that have been sown in your cultivation ? 
 
 In measuring length a fraction is denoted by huka ; 
 e.g. 
 
 E ono whatianga, huka to te whitu, It is six 
 
 whatiangas* long, not quite seven. 
 E waru maro,* huka to te iwa, It is eight maro, not 
 
 quite nine. 
 
 Ordinals. The ordinal numbers are formed : 
 
 1. By tua prefixed to the cardinal; e.g. tua toru, 
 third ; tua iwa, ninth. 
 
 2. By whaka prefixed ; e.g. whakatekau, tenth. 
 
 3. By the simple cardinal with the definite article : 
 ko te wha tenei o aku haerenga mai, this is the fourth of 
 my comings here ; i.e. this is the fourth time I have 
 come here. 
 
 * Whatianga corresponds to the ancient cubit ; maro is what a man can 
 measure with his extended arms. 
 
OF THE PRONOUNS. 27 
 
 CHAPTEE YI. 
 
 OF THE PKONOUNS. 
 The personal pronouns of Maori are as follows 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Ahau, or au, I. 
 
 Koe, thou. 
 la, he. 
 
 DUAL. 
 
 Taua, you and I. 
 Maua, he and I. 
 Korua, you two. 
 Raua, they two. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 !Tatou, you all and myself. 
 Matou, they and myself. 
 
 Koutou, ye. 
 Ratou, they. 
 
 The first person dual and plural has, as may be 
 seen in the above table, two forms, taua and tatou, 
 maua and matou; the former class maybe denominated 
 inclusive, the latter exclusive. For example : 
 
 The speaker of a company, who is addressing a 
 person just come in, uses matou : e tatari ana matou 
 ki a koe, we are, or have been, waiting for you. If 
 he means that only himself and another have been 
 waiting, he uses maua : e tatari ana maua kia a koe ; 
 but when he addresses the whole company, he uses 
 tatou : Tatou ki te kai, let us go to dinner. If, how- 
 ever, he is addressing only another besides himself, he 
 uses taua ; Taua ki te kai, let us (two) go to dinner. 
 Again, if he says, No matou tenei kainga, he tells 
 you, the hearer, that he and others possess this farm. 
 If he says, No maua tenei kainga, he tells you that 
 
28 OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 he and some other person already mentioned possess 
 it. If, however, he uses tatou : No tatou tenei kainga, 
 he means that all that he is addressing have a share 
 in it. If he says, No taua tenei kainga, he tells you, 
 the hearer, that it belongs to you and himself. 
 
 Note. The student will find hereafter that the dual number 
 is sometimes used for the plural. 
 
 In addressing an individual, ia is sometimes used in the 
 second person by Ngapuhi ; e.g. E ia. It is used in a very 
 strange combination also with wai by some tribes ; e.g. 
 Ko wai ia ? tvho said so ? 
 
 The Personal Pronouns admit, in the singular, of 
 declension ; e.g. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Norn. Ahau, or Au, L 
 Poss. Naku, or Noku, mine. 
 
 Obj. Ahau, or Au (preceded by some preposition), 
 e.g. 
 
 Ki a au, or, ki ahau, to me. 
 
 E a hau, or, e a au, by me. 
 
 Maku or Moku, for me. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 JVbm. Koe, thou. 
 Poss. Nau, or Nou, thine. 
 
 Obj. Koe (preceded by some preposition) ; e.g. 
 kei a koe, with thee. 
 Mau, and Mou, for you. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Nom. Ia, he. 
 
 Poss. Nona, or Nana, his or hers. 
 
 Obj. Ia (preceded by some preposition) ; e.g. 
 
 I a ia, from him, or from her. 
 
 Mona and Mana, for him, or for her. 
 
 Pronouns, in common with nouns, have no gender. 
 There is no word in Maori to denote the pronoun it. 
 
OF THE PRONOUNS. 29 
 
 Its place is generally supplied by some artifice of the 
 construction, as will be shown in the Syntax. 
 
 OF THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 As the possessive pronouns are closely connected 
 with the personal, they may be mentioned next. 
 They are as follows : 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Toku, or taku, or taku, my 
 Tou, to, or tau, thy 
 Tona, tana, or tana, Ms 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Oku, aku, or aku, my 
 Ou, o, au, thy 
 Ona, ana, ana, his 
 
 The other possessive pronouns are formed from the 
 dual and plural of their respective pronouns by pre- 
 fixing o ; e.g. 
 
 ( taua, ) /. , ( tatou, ) 
 
 o < \ of us two o \ . 7 \ 
 
 ( maua, J ( matou, ) 
 
 o korua, of you two 
 o raua, of them two 
 
 our 
 
 o koutou, your 
 o ratou, their 
 
 Such words as himself his own, my own, &c. are 
 expressed in Maori by some adverb added in the sen- 
 tence ; e.g. Nona ahe ano tona aroha ki a tatou, his 
 love to us was his own ; i.e. was self -derived. 
 
 The adverbs most usually employed for this pur- 
 pose are ahe, ano, noa, iho, tonu. 
 
 RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 For these there is no distinct form in Maori. Some- 
 times they are wholly omitted in the sentence ; e.g. 
 
 Ko te tangata tenei i patua e Hone, this is the 
 man that was beaten by John. 
 
 At other times their place is supplied by some arti- 
 fice of the construction. (See Syntax, chap, xvii., 5.) 
 
30 OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.' 
 
 The demonstrative pronouns are as follows : Taua, 
 tenei, tenet, tera, and their respective plurals, aua, enei, 
 ena, era. 
 
 Tenet is applied to the object nearest at hand, or to 
 the point of discourse to which the speaker had last 
 alluded ; tena to an object near to or connected with 
 you, the person spoken to ; tera to an object farther 
 remote ; e.g. 
 
 No Hone tenei ware, this is John's house. 
 
 No Penehamine tena, that one near you. 
 
 No Kukutai tera, that one farther off is Kukutai's. 
 
 The same distinction is to be observed in the plural 
 number. 
 
 It may be questioned whether tenei and its branches are not, 
 like to (vide article e, 2, page 11), compounded of two words 
 viz., te and nei, &c. They can always, at least, be resolved 
 into them ; e.g. Ho mai tena mea, give me that thing, is the 
 same as Ho mai te mea na. There is, however, a little differ- 
 ence in the uses of these two forms, which the attentive student 
 will discover by observation. 
 
 Nei, na, and ra are mostly added (like the ci and la of 
 French) to point at the object more forcibly. 
 
 When the speaker wishes to denote the object with famil- 
 iarity, contempt, &c, he generally uses the resolved form; 
 e.g. Ka hinga ahau i te wakatakariri ki te tangata nei, I fall 
 with anger at the fellow here. 
 
 Sometimes we meet with nei and its branches twice repeated ; 
 e.g. tenei na, tera ra. 
 
 Nei, &c. are often used in asking questions ; e.g. Nei na ? 
 Is this it ? Ra ra ? Is that it ? 
 
 Note. The speaker should be careful in speaking not to 
 confound this demi -pronoun with the interrogative particle Ne. 
 
 Sometimes we meet with ia used as a demonstrative, 
 e.g. 
 
 Tona wenua kai ha ia 9 that is the very land of 
 food. 
 
 Note. Anei and ara are often used by Ngapuhi for enei and 
 era. 
 
OF THE PRONOUNS. 31 
 
 THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUx^S. 
 
 The interrogative pronouns are wai, aha, teliea (and 
 its plural ehea), kohea, and sometimes (particularly in 
 Waikato) pehea. 
 
 Wai is applied (1) to persons, and (2) to animals or 
 things, as canoes, ships, &c, to which the name of a 
 man has been given, and is always the pronoun used 
 in asking the question, What is his name ? It is 
 sometimes applied to countries, &c. ; but, in such cases 
 kohea is the pronoun most frequently used, 
 
 The following are examples of the uses of wai and 
 kohea : 
 
 Ko wai tena ? Who is that ? 
 
 Na wai tenei ? Whose is this ? 
 
 Ko wai tena kuri ? Who is that dog ? i.e. what 
 
 is his name ? 
 Ko wai tena poti ? ko, Wikitoria, What boat is 
 
 that ? Ans . , Victoria. 
 Ko wai tona ingoa ? What is his name f 
 Ko wai tena whenua ? What country is that 9 
 Kohea tenei ? What place is this ? 
 
 Note. Wai will sometimes take the plural form by having 
 ma postfixed ; e.g. Ko wai ma ena? Who are they ? 
 
 Aha is applied to everything in which h'nd is 
 denoted ; so also is pehea, sometimes. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 He aha tena mea ? what (insect, animal, or thing) 
 
 is that ? 
 Ko Hone aha ? which John was it ? [was it John 
 
 the Baptist, or John the Apostle ?) 
 He aha a Erihapeti ki a Hone? what {relation) 
 
 is Elizabeth to John ? 
 Na te aha ? from what cause ? (why ?) 
 Pehea ana to whakaaro ? what is your thought ? 
 
 i.e., what do you think ? 
 
 7 
 
32 OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 E taea te pehea ? ivhat can be done ? how can it be 
 
 helped. 
 He kai pehea tena kai ? what hind of food is that ? 
 
 Note. The above sentence decides the right of pehea to be 
 considered a pronoun. Most of the compounds, however, of hea 
 such as kohea, pehea, nohea, ihea, mohea, &c. ought most 
 probably to be considered as belonging to the class of adverbs. 
 
 The student will find, as we proceed, that the lines of dis- 
 tinction between the various classes of pronoun, adverb, 
 preposition, noun, verb, and adjective are frequently but faintly 
 marked, and that the same word may be often noticed as stand- 
 ing in four or five different ranks. 
 
 Tehea, and its plural ehea, is applied to which of a 
 number, and is used to denote persons or things ; e.g. 
 
 Ko tehea tau e pai ai ? which do you choose ? 
 Ko ehea tangata an e ki nei? which men do you 
 speak of? 
 
 THE DISTRIBUTIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Each and every one are expressed by the demon- 
 strative or possessive pronoun, and the noun twice or 
 thrice repeated ; e.g. 
 
 Haria mai e tera tangata, e tera tangata, tana 
 kono riwai, bring each man his basket of potatoes. 
 la tangata ia tangata, each man. 
 I tenei ra i tenei ra, each day. 
 E warea ana ki tana mahi ki tana mahi, each is 
 engaged ivith his own particular business. 
 
 THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Some other and any are most frequently denoted 
 by te tahi, and its plural e tahi. 
 
 Kua kite ahau i e tahi, I saw some (of them). 
 Ko e tahi kihai i kitea e ahau, some I did not see. 
 Kahore kau ahau i kite i te tahi, I did not see 
 any at all. 
 
OF THE PRONOUNS. 33 
 
 Whatever, whatsoever, &c. are expressed in various 
 ways, as may be seen in the following examples : 
 
 Eo^iDMtoMemeaai] wkttmr ^ _ 
 
 koutou; or, Col. iii. 17. 
 
 Ko nga aha noa y &c. &c. ) 
 Ko ta koutou e inoi ai \ toku ingoa, ivhatever ye 
 
 ash in My name. 
 Kia ho atu ki a ia tana mea e inoi ai ia, to give 
 
 her whatsoever she would ask. Matt. xiv. 7. 
 Ka kai koutou, ka inu, ha aha ranei, whether ye 
 
 eat or drink, or whatever ye do. 1 Cor. x 31. 
 
34 OF THE VERBS. 
 
 CHAPTEE VII. 
 OF THE VERBS.* 
 
 1. Classification. They may be distributed 
 into 
 
 (a) Primitive, i.e. underived from other words; 
 e.g. 
 
 Noho, to sit. 
 Hoku, to catch. 
 
 (b) Derivative, i.e. such as are derived from words 
 of some other root ; e.g. 
 
 E hakahu ana i tona, is putting on his garment. 
 
 I ahatia koe ? What was done to you ? 
 
 Penatia, do it in that manner. 
 
 E hau, if it How. 
 
 Narungatia mai, push it in from above. 
 
 E pai ana, it is good. 
 
 This class is by far the most numerous. Under it 
 also may be comprised 
 
 (1.) Verbs formed by reduplication ; e.g. 
 
 Korerorero, to hold conversation with, &c. 
 
 * There are many things connected with this subject that will, no doubt, 
 often appear strange to the European reader ; and he will frequently have 
 to be careful lest he be misled by theories derived from occidental gram- 
 mars. In those languages the verb is a leading word in the sentence, and 
 by it exclusively is the office of affirmation or predication performed. 
 
 In Maori, on the contrary, a pure genuine verb is by no means of fiequent 
 occurrence. Almost any word denoting a thing or quality is capable of 
 sustaining that office, and predication is as frequently implied as expressed. 
 In considering, therefore, the Maori verbs, we shall have to examine not 
 only those words which have been invested with the properties belonging 
 to that class, but also those forms in which no mark of predication is 
 expressed. The term predication we have adopted, for want of a better, 
 to denote those functions which are peculiar to the verb, and which are 
 sometimes described by grammarians under the terms "affirmation " and 
 "assertion." 
 
OF THE VERBS. 35 
 
 (2.) Compound verbs, .*., verbs formed from two or 
 more words joined together ; e.g. 
 
 Ma-te-matapihitia mai, give it me by the window. 
 Whaka-ngoi-koretia, made weak. 
 
 Note. As the same word is very frequently used in Maori as 
 verb, substantive, adjective, and adverb, it is often impossible, 
 to determine under which of the above classes it should be 
 ranked ; neither, indeed, will it be necessary, as the origin of the 
 verb in no way affects its grammatical relations. 
 
 2. Number, Person, and Gender. Maori verbs 
 are not declined by inflection i.e. by variation of the 
 ground form ; and therefore know nothing of number, 
 person, and gender. 
 
 3. Mood and Tense. As neither the ground 
 form nor the auxiliary particles experience any varia- 
 tion from change of mood, we cannot recognize any 
 grammatical form for denoting moods in Maori, and 
 shall not therefore enter any farther into the subject 
 at present. 
 
 Note. The only variations we have been able to discover 
 are 
 
 1st. Those for denoting the imperative mood. 
 
 2nd. The prefixing of the particle whaka to the verb, and 
 thus causing a Hiphil or causative conjugation. 
 
 4. Tense. Maori abounds in a variety of forms 
 for denoting modifications of time. They are desig- 
 nated by verbal particles, adverbs, prepositions, 
 and the articles he and te placed in connection 
 with the verb. The force of these, again, is, in 
 a large majority of cases, determined by the con- 
 text ; and we believe ourselves to be correct in saying 
 that there are, in this language, but few absolute 
 forms for determining tense ; for example : 
 
 E moe ana, he ie sleeping. 
 
 I reira e moe ana, there was he sleeping, or there 
 he slept. 
 
36 OF THE VERBS. 
 
 i"riri au, I was angry. 
 
 Mo te aha koe i riri mai ai ki a au ? why are you 
 
 angry with me ? 
 Ka haere ahau, I will go. 
 Na lea whakatika a Hone, then John rose. 
 
 See also Prepositions (mo). 
 
 Note. The verbal particles are words which have no 
 meaning in themselves, but which, prefixed to a word, endue 
 it with the qualities of a verb. They correspond to the 
 auxilliary verbs of English, but do not admit of the same 
 varieties of application, neither can they lay claim to the 
 rank of verb substantive. Thus, in Maori, we have no direct 
 form for such phrases as the following, I am, you will, &c. 
 
 5. They are as follows : e, ana, ka, Tcua, i, Ma, 
 hei, me, haua, aua, hei. 
 
 Their nses will be best ascertained by examining 
 the paradigm at the end of this section. A more full 
 consideration of them and of the other modes of con- 
 struction which are therein contained, will be deferred 
 to the Syntax. 
 
 6. It may be naturally expected that, in an un- 
 polished language like Maori, there should not be 
 much that is artificial or complicated in the arrange- 
 ment of the tenses. They are in form either simple 
 or compound. 
 
 7. A simple sentence* is that which consists of 
 only one time ; e.g. 
 
 * We have adopted the term "sentence" in preference to "proposi- 
 tion," lest the student should be led into perplexity by conceiving that we 
 used the terms simple and compound in the same senses as those in which 
 they are used by logicians. 
 
 From our examples he will see that we should call a sentence simple 
 even though the subject and predicate be complex terms. 
 
 By noticing whether, when the sentence is translated, one or two verbs 
 are introduced, and whether either of them is dependent in time on the 
 other, the student will easily make the distinction that we are desirous of 
 establishing. The importance of this distinction will be seen in our ex- 
 amples of a compound sentence (page 37). For, in the first, e-ana, which 
 is present in a simple sentence, is now past ; in the second, kua is future, 
 though it strictly belongs to the past tense ; in the fourth example, this 
 same particle stands for the pluperfect potential. 
 
OF THE VERBS. 37 
 
 E pai, ana, it is good. 
 
 Kahore ahau i kite, I did not see (it). 
 
 Ko tatou katoa, ano he hipi, kua marara ke ; we 
 
 all, as sheep, have gone astray. 
 Kua mate to tatou Kai whakaora i runga i te te 
 
 ripeka, our Saviour died upon the cross. 
 
 A compound sentence is that in which two times 
 are introduced ; e.g. 
 
 1 . Me i reira ahau e pai ana', if I had been there 
 it would have been ivell. 
 
 2. Akuanei, tae rawa atu, kua mate ; it will come 
 to pass, that, ivhen I have got there, he will be 
 dead. 
 
 3. Kua mate ahau, e ora ana nga rakau nei, I 
 shall die before these sticks decay. 
 
 4. Me i whakararatatia i mua, kua rarata tenei ; 
 if it had been tamed before, it would have been 
 tame noiv. 
 
 Of this, however, more hereafter. 
 
 It will often be very necessary to notice the circum- 
 stances connected with the uttering of a sentence i e. 
 whether it be emphatic ; whether it be the answer to 
 a question ; whether a large measure of certainty is 
 designed to be implied, &c. &c. 
 
 8. The imperative mood of Maori abounds in 
 more minute distinctions than any other part of the 
 verb. We present them all here, chiefly because the 
 sentences in which they occur are, for the most part, 
 simple. 
 
 1. The most common form for expressing the im- 
 perative of an active verb is by its passive ; e.g. 
 
 ACTIVE FORM. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Patu, to strike. Patua, strike fit). 
 
 Tua, to fell. Tuaina, fell (it). 
 
38 OF THE VERBS. 
 
 2. (a) If the verb be neuter, the simple ground 
 form is used ; e.g. 
 
 Haere, go. 
 
 Hororo, make haste. 
 
 Tena, he prompt, be quick. 
 
 Kati, he quiet. 
 
 Whetero, put out your tongue/ 1 ' 
 
 (b) Occasionally, however, we find the passive form 
 used, when the meaning of the verb is neuter ; e.g. 
 
 Hapainga, let us start. 
 
 Takiritia, idem. 
 
 Kokiritia, dasli forward (in pursuit, &c.) 
 
 Hoea tatou, let us paddle. 
 
 Sometimes both active and neuter verbs will take 
 the verbal prefixes e, kia, hei, me, kaua, aua, kei, 
 before them to denote the imperative. 
 
 (c) B is used sometimes to denote the imperative of 
 active and neuter verbs. It is chiefly used with the 
 second person singular, dual, and plural. 
 
 It is never found in the first person singular, but is 
 occasionally used in the first person dual and plural. 
 "We know of no instance in which it is employed in 
 the third person, and we believe the following sentence 
 to be incorrect: E aroha mai te Atua ki a tatou, 
 may God love us. 
 
 \d) Kia is capable of being used in all the persons 
 of the imperative. It is the particle most frequently 
 used with the first person. In the second, it is chiefly 
 used with verbalized adjectives (page 43) ; e.g. kia 
 
 * In speaking of actions done by members of the body, Maori never 
 supposes the individual, but rather the member, to perform the act. 
 Thus, such expressions as "lift up your head," "open your mouth," 
 "stretch out your leg," would not be rendered, as we have heard some 
 speakers express it, by " huaia ake to matenga," " hamamatia to waha," 
 &c, but rather "kia ara ake to matenga," "hamama tou waha,' 
 " wharoro tou waewae." 
 
 We have, indeed, occasionally heard a native say, wheterongia (whate- 
 rongia, Ngapuhi) tou arero, titahangia ; but these phrases are rare. 
 
OF THE VERBS. 39 
 
 oti ; though occasionally it is prefixed to the verb. In 
 the third person, it is used before either adjective or 
 verb. 
 
 The dehortative and cautionary particles kaua, aua, 
 Jcei, belong strictly to the imperative. 
 
 (e) Under this head we should perhaps also mention 
 the particle me. It will be observed that it does not 
 take the passive after it ; e.g. 
 
 Me patu te te poaka. 
 Me hanga te taiepa. 
 
 (/) The only particles the imperative of passive 
 verbs will admit before it are kia, Icaua, aua, and hei. 
 Following is a table of sentences illustrative of the 
 above remarks. Other forms are given by which the 
 imperative is sometimes denoted : 
 
 1st Form. Whakaakona ahau, teach me. 
 
 2nd. Whakatika, arise. 
 Noho atu, remain away. 
 Hoki mai, come bach. 
 Noho puku, sit quiet. 
 Tupeke, jump. 
 Pepeke, draw up your legs. 
 
 3rd. E ara, arise. 
 E noho, sit down. 
 Haere koe, e hoki, go, return. 
 E kai, eat. 
 E ngaki taua, let us two dig (it). 
 
 4th. Tena koa, kia wakamatau ahau, give it here, let 
 
 me try it. 
 Kia kaha, be strong. 
 Kia hohoro, make haste. 
 Kia ara (te pou), let (the post) be upright. 
 Ko tena, kia nekehia atu, as for that, let it be 
 
 moved away (by them J . 
 Kia maia tatou, let us be courageous, &c. 
 
40 OF THE VERBS. 
 
 5th.- E ! kaua ahau e haere ki reira. Pish! lei me 
 not go there. 
 Aua e tukua, do not let it go. 
 Kei ngaro, take care lest it be lost. 
 Kei whakarongo atu tatou, let us not listen, &c. 
 
 6th.. Ka oti tena, me ngaki a konei e koe, ivhen that 
 is finished, this place must be dug by you. 
 
 7th. Maku etahi, {give) me some. 
 
 8th. Hei konei koutou noho ai, do you stop here. 
 
 9th. Kati te tahae i aku merene, cease stealing my 
 melons ; i.e. do not, &c. 
 
 10th. E tae koe, ka tono mai i a Hone, ivhen you 
 arrive there, send John here. 
 
 11th. Tatou ki te to, we to drag ; i.e. let us go to 
 drag {the canoe). 
 
 12th. Ko te tangata kua tukua mai, (before you send 
 the pigs) let the messenger be sent here. 
 
 TENSES. 
 PRESENT SINGULAR. 
 
 1 . E patu ana ahau, I am striking, or strike. 
 
 2. E patu ana koe, you are striking, &c. 
 
 3. E patu ana ia, he is striking, &c. 
 
 DUAL AND PLURAL. 
 
 1. E patu ana maua, or matou. 
 
 2. E patu ana korua, or koutou. 
 
 3. E patu ana raua, or ratou. 
 
 OTHER FORMS FOR THE PRESENT. 
 
 1 . Kahore ahau e pai, / am not willing. 
 
 2. Ko au tenei, here I am (lit., this is I). 
 
 3. He tangata kino koe, you (are) a bad man. 
 
 4. Ko toku matua ko Kukutai, Kukutai (is) my 
 father. 
 
OF THE VERBS. 41 
 
 5. Ka pai, it is good. 
 
 6. E haere mai, she is coming. 
 
 7. E pai ranei koe ? are you willing ? 
 
 8. E ke nei (or na) koe, you affirm. 
 
 9. Kei te patu, he is hilling (it) (lit., at the killing). 
 10. Noku tenei wahi, this place is mine (lit., mine 
 
 this place). 
 
 PAST TENSE. 
 
 1. I reira ahau i te ata nei, I (was) there this morning. 
 
 2. Ko Rawiri te matua o Horomona, David (was) 
 
 the father of Solomon, 
 
 3. He tangata mohio a Horomona, Solomon (was) 
 
 a ivise man. 
 
 4. I haere ano ahau, I went. 
 
 5. Nau i whakaatu, you disclosed. 
 
 6. Ka haere a Ihu, Jesus went. 
 
 7. E ngari a Hone ka kite, John rather saw it 
 
 (not I). 
 
 8. Haere ana a Ihu, Jesus went. 
 
 9. He ua tena, that was rain, it rained (used chiefly 
 
 in animated description). 
 
 10. He tini aku korerotanga ki a ia, many (have 
 
 been) my conversations with him. 
 
 11. Ko te tangata kua tukua mai, the messenger had 
 
 been sent (before the other thing ivas done) . 
 
 12. Kihai i pai mai, he was not pleased. 
 
 13. Ka te tuku tena wahi (Ngapuhi), that place has 
 
 been given to, &c. 
 
 14. Kua patua te poaka? has the pig been hilled 9 
 
 15. Kua oti noa ake taku mahi, my ivorh has been 
 
 finished this some time. 
 16 He mea hanga naku te purutanga, the handle 
 was made by myself [lit., the handle (was) a 
 thing made of mine (actively)]. 
 
 FUTUEE. 
 
 1. Ka haere ahau, T will go. 
 
 2. E riri mai koe ? will you be angry ? 
 
42 OF THE VERBS. 
 
 3. Maku e patu, I will hill (it) [lit., the killing (it 
 
 is to be) for me]. 
 
 4. Ko koe te haere ? are you (the person) that is to 
 
 go? 
 
 5. Tera e mate, he will die {perhaps) (lit., that will 
 
 die). 
 
 6. E kore e tukua, it will not he let go. 
 
 7 . E tae koe ki Waitemata, when you go to Waite- 
 
 mata. 
 
 8. Akuanei ko ia kua tae, the chances are that he 
 
 will get there first (lit., presently it is he that 
 has arrived). 
 
 9. Kowai hei tiki ? who is to fetch it ? 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Haere ki te whiu, go to drive (it), (lit., go to the 
 
 driving). 
 Pai kia haere, willing to go. 
 E kor e eahei te tohe, 1 cannot press you (lit., 
 
 the pressing cannot be effected). 
 
 6. Voice. Maori verbs, in respect of voice, may 
 be considered under the three well-known heads of 
 active, passive, and neuter. 
 
 7. The active is the simple root modified by one 
 or more of the words already mentioned ; e.g. e patu 
 ana ahau, I am striking. 
 
 8. The passive is the root varied in its termination ; 
 e.g. e patua ana ahau, I am- struck. 
 
 Note. Verbs derived from the simple adjective will 
 generally rank under the head of neuter. Under this class 
 also do we reduce a species of verbs in the arrangement of 
 which we have felt some difficulty viz., such words as 
 pakaru, broken; marere, conceded, &c, i.e., words which are 
 neuter in form, but passive in meaning ; which correspond in 
 meaning to the past participle passive of the European lan- 
 guages, but are not traceable to any root. After much con- 
 sideration we are inclined to think that they may most satis- 
 factorily be regarded as adjectives, and classified accordingly. 
 
OP THE VERBS. 43 
 
 Thus, in the following sentence, ' ' Kua pakaru to waka i 
 te ngaru," the canoe has been broken by the waves , we should 
 regard pakaru as an adjective, or rather a verbalized adjective, 
 just as much as we should kino in the following : " Kua kino 
 te waka i te paru," the canoe is bad, or uncomfortable, through the 
 filth. 
 
 To any who wish to regard such a class as passive participles, 
 we would reply that the preposition i (not e) following them 
 clearly determines them as belonging to the neuter family ; 
 and that, though their meaning may not coincide with our 
 definition of a neuter verb, yet we feel no difficulty on that 
 head : for we only act in common with other grammarians, 
 who have laid it down as a useful rule, u apotiori nomen fit." 
 
 For a table of such words, see farther on. 
 
 In the passive we meet with variation in the termi- 
 nation of the ground form. 
 
 9. ACTIVE VOICE. PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 A, to drive away, &c. Aia. 
 
 Ka (v. n.) to burn (as afire) IL&ngia. 
 
 Maka, to throw away Maka. 
 
 Wakama, to make clean Wakamato. 
 
 Hura, to expose (by taking Hurato, or HuYmgia. 
 
 off the cover) 
 Whakateka, to denounce as Wakatekam^; Wha- 
 
 false katekaia. 
 
 Aroha, to love Aroham#, or Arohafotf. 
 
 Tua, to fell (as a tree) Tuam#, or TxL&Mna. 
 
 Raranga, to knit (a native Rangato. 
 
 basket, &c.) 
 
 {Me&tia. 
 Meinga. 
 Meingatia (Ngapuhi). 
 He (verb, adj.) unacquainted Henyia. 
 
 with, &c. 
 Kukume, to pull Kume#. 
 
 Here (v. n.) sail, as a boat, ( Heia. 
 
 and to flow as water \ I&erenyia. 
 
 Whakatete, to milk Wakatete^#. 
 
 Paihere, to bind in bundles Paihere^M. 
 
44 
 
 OF THE VERBS. 
 
 Ope, to gather, &c. (in hand- 
 ful s) 
 
 Whakapae, besiege, or to 
 accuse falsely 
 
 Whakaae, assent to 
 
 Hi, to fish with a hook 
 
 Riringi (v. a.), to spill 
 
 Whaki, to confess 
 
 Arahi, to guide 
 
 Whawhaki, to gather (as 
 
 grapes, &c.) 
 Kikini, to pinch 
 
 Whangai, to feed 
 
 Pupuhi, to fire (a gun), or 
 
 to blow with the mouth 
 Pai (adj.), good 
 Ho-mai ) , 
 Ho-atu \ i0 $ we 
 Waiho, leave 
 
 Ko, to dig 
 
 Mono, to calk 
 
 Horo, (part, adj.), tumble 
 
 down, as a land-slip 
 Horo, to swallow 
 
 Whakato, to sow or plant 
 
 Takoto (v. n.), to lie 
 Aro, to regard with favour 
 Manako (same as aro) 
 Toko, to propel by poles 
 Rongo, to hear 
 
 Whawhao, to stoic 
 
 \ 
 
 i 
 
 \ 
 
 Oj)ehia. 
 
 Whakapae^. 
 
 Whakaaewy^. 
 
 or 
 Whakaae^. 
 Hi#. 
 
 Hingitia. 
 Hmgihia. 
 Whakiw#. 
 Arahina. 
 Whakiia. 
 
 'Kinitia, 
 Whangai^. 
 Whangai wy. 
 Puhi#. 
 
 Taingia. 
 
 Ho-mai. 
 
 Ho-atu. 
 
 Waiho. 
 
 ~Koia. 
 
 Kongia. 
 
 Mono#. 
 
 Horongia. 
 
 HoTomia. 
 
 WakatoX'M. 
 
 Wakato^M. 
 
 Takoton'tf. 
 
 Arongia. 
 
 ManakoAm. 
 
 Tokona. 
 
 "Remgona. 
 
 ~Wh.ELOivhina. 
 
 Whaotf. 
 
OF THE VERBS. 45 
 
 Utuutu, to draw water "Utuhia. 
 
 Utu, to pay Utu#. 
 
 Ruku (v. n.), to dive Hukuhia. 
 
 Tu (v. n.), to stand Tuna. 
 
 Whakau, to kindle , WhsLkaungia . 
 
 Hohou, to bind fencing, &c. ~H.ouh.ia. 
 
 Whawh.au (Waikato), idem Whauwhia. 
 
 Maumau (part, a.), wasted Maumaum. 
 
 Tatau, to fight against T&uria 
 
 Tatau, to count Ta.ua. 
 
 Hahau, to seek Hahau/m 
 
 Whakahou, to make new Whakahoufe. 
 
 Mate-nui, much coveted Mate-nuife. 
 
 Tangata-whenua, a denizen Tangata-whenuato, to be 
 
 naturalized. 
 
 (a) It will be seen that the above arrangement is 
 made according to the final letter of the ground 
 form, and that each division contains some examples 
 of re-duplicated words, and of words ending in diph- 
 thongs. 
 
 (b) That, in words ending in a, the passive is 
 mostly made by adding to the last syllable ia, ngia, 
 kia, hia, ina, atia, kina. 
 
 (c) That some verbs receive no additions to the 
 last syllable, as maka. On the Eastern Coast ia takes 
 the place of simple a in the passive ; e.g. maka, 
 makaia. 
 
 The speaker should be always careful, in pronouncing the 
 passive a, to throw the emphasis strongly on the last syllable. 
 The following words are of this description: Panga, to throw- 
 away ; pana, to shove away, &c. ; kanga, to curse ; wakamana, 
 to ratify ', &c. ; taunaha, to bespeak; unga, to send; waha, to 
 carry on the back. 
 
 (d) That some verbs have sometimes two or more 
 terminations for the passive ; as arohatia, arohaina, 
 
46 Or THE VERBS. 
 
 arohangia. We may here remark that some words 
 have different passives in different districts ; e.g. 
 
 Whangainga (Ngapuhi), Whangaia (Waikato). 
 
 (e) That in words, one or more of the syllables of 
 which are repeated, the re-duplication will frequently 
 be dropped in the passive ; e.g. 
 
 Kikina, kinitia ; tapatapahi, tapahia, &c. 
 
 Note. It must, however, be noticed that there are many 
 exceptions to this rule, and that the omitting or retaining the 
 re -duplication is often left to the option of the speaker. In 
 those instances, however, in which he wishes to denote with 
 peculiar emphasis the distribution, repetition, &c, implied 
 by the re- duplication, he always, as far as he can, retains 
 it; e.g. 
 
 Titititia, strike every one of the nails. 
 Patupatua, strike with many blows, &c. 
 
 (/) In a few instances we meet with a passive 
 formed by a change of the first syllable ; e.g. 
 
 Kongo, to hear ; rangona (passive) ; wakarongo, 
 wakarangona {passive) . 
 
 Examples of this rule are very few. 
 
 (g) Of the passives of compound verbs, two 
 examples are given at the end of the table. The rule 
 for their formation is the same as that for the passives 
 of simple verbs : the final letters, in both cases, being 
 the only thing on which they depend. Occasionally, 
 however, we meet with a word resolved into two parts, 
 and each part put into the passive voice ; e.g. 
 
 Kaihau (v. act.), to sell the property of an indi- 
 vidual without giving him any part of the 
 payment ; Kai^fl-haufotf (passive). 
 
 There is another form, similar to the preceding, 
 which requires to be mentioned here, viz., when two 
 verbs follow each other in immediate succession, one 
 
OF THE VERBS. 47 
 
 of which acts as a kind of adverb or qualifying word 
 to the other, they will both sympathize with each 
 other in voice will either be both active or both pas- 
 sive; e.g. 
 
 Toia haeretia, dragged along; literally, dragged 
 
 gone. 
 Tukua whakareretia, let down with a dash. 
 Kai moe, eat sleeping, i.e., while he is eating he is 
 sleeping. 
 
 In such phrases the latter of the two verbs will 
 generally take tia for its passive form. 
 
 (h) Occassionally a passive word may be met with 
 which has no active as parangia e te moe, oppressed 
 by sleep ; rokohina and rokohanga, waiho, homai, and 
 hoatu. 
 
 {i) Passive verbs are used in a more extended 
 sense in Maori than what is commonly met with in 
 other languages, not excepting, perhaps, even the 
 three passives of Hebrew. 
 
 The following are a few illustrations of the various 
 uses : 
 
 Haere, to go, v. n. ; te huarahi i haerea e ia, the 
 
 road ly which he travelled. 
 Neke, move away {yourself) v. n. ; nekehia atu, 
 
 imp., move {the thing) away ; kua nekehia, was 
 
 moved away. 
 Titore, diffisus ; Titorehia, imp.; dijjinde, adj. 
 Oioi contremo, or nuto, v. n.; oioia, imp.; agita, v. a. 
 Riri, angry ; riria, angered {e.g. ka riria ahau e ia) . 
 Pai, good ; kia pai, let it (the thing) be good. 
 Waka^'a, imp., put it {the place, &c.) to rights. 
 Wakajptfmgia, to be accepted or approved of. 
 Korero, to speak; korerotia, made the subject of 
 
 conversation. 
 Whakaaro, v. n., to think; whakaarohia, imp., 
 
 think {of the thing) ; whakaarohia iho, think {of 
 
 yourself &c.) 
 
48 OF THE VERBS. 
 
 Kau, swim, v. n.; ka kauria (te awa), is sivum over 
 
 (the stream) ; ka wakakauria (te hoiho), (the 
 
 horse) is made to swim over. 
 Kakahu, a garment ; kakahuria (tou), put on your 
 
 (garment) ; wakakahuria (te tamaiti), put on 
 
 the child's clothes. 
 Whangai, to feed; whaugaia ma te ngohi, given as 
 
 food for the fishes. 
 Tae, to arrive at (a place); ka taea Waitoke, 
 
 Waitohe has been arrived at. 
 Taea noatia tenei ra, until it is arrived (at, i.e. up 
 
 to) this day. 
 Huri, to turn (a grindstone, &c.) ; kia hurihia taku 
 
 toki, that my axe may be turned i.e. ground. 
 Whawhao, to stoiv or put into a basket, &c. 
 Kua whaowhina te kete ki te tupeka, the basket 
 
 was stowed (with) tobacco i.e. had tobacco put into 
 
 it. 
 Manene, to beg ; kei manenetia koe ki te tupeka, 
 
 lest you should be begged for tobacco i.e. lest 
 
 tobacco should be begged from you. 
 Horihoii, to tell falsehoods ; ko te mea i horihoria 
 
 e koe lie tangata, the thing you erroneously said 
 
 was a man ; ko te mea i whakahorihoria e koe, 
 
 the thing you denounced as false. 
 
 For further remarks on this part of the Maori verb, 
 vide chap. xix. 
 
 (k) Note. The student will sometimes find that the simple 
 root is used with a similar variation of meaning ; e.g. 
 
 "Waha, to carry on the back ; e waha, get on my back. 
 
 He paipa hei puru mo taku tupeka, a pipe to plug my 
 tobacco : into which to plug my tobacco. 
 
 Te waka e to na, the canoe that lies dragged up there. 
 
 Te rakau e pou na, the stake that is fixed there. 
 
 Kei tehea whare nga tangata ? Kei te whare e ngiha mai 
 na, In which house are the people ? In the house that 
 burns ; i.e. in the house in which the lights burn. 
 
 Kei te tao te kai, food is being coolced {in the oven). 
 
OF THE VERBS. 
 
 49 
 
 Sentences, however, like the last of these are mostly 
 employed when emphasis and brevity are desired more than 
 accuracy. 
 
 12. The verbal nouns also (for which vide chap. 
 3, c.) experience considerable variations in meaning. 
 They are in most cases formed from the passive voice 
 of the root ; and as the rules for their formation may 
 be easily learnt by comparing a few with their respec- 
 tive ground forms, it may perhaps be sufficient to 
 give the nouns derived from the verbs of the last 
 mentioned table : 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 VERBAL NOUNS. 
 
 Aia, 
 
 Anga. 
 
 K&ngia, 
 
 ~Kiinga. 
 
 Maka 
 
 M.akanga. 
 
 Wakama/;^, 
 
 "Wakamsikanga. 
 
 HuraA/tf, 
 
 Hur&hanga. 
 
 Wakateka/wtf, 
 
 Wakatekaw^w. 
 
 Arohato, 
 
 Axoh&tanga. 
 
 Tuam#, 
 
 Tu&kanga. 
 
 M.ea.tia, 
 
 Meat any a. 
 
 Hengia, 
 
 Heanga, or Henga. 
 
 Kume#, 
 
 Kumenga. 
 
 Herengia, 
 
 Renga. 
 
 Paihere^, 
 
 Faihcvetanga. 
 
 Hifl, 
 
 TLianga. 
 
 'Rmgihia J 
 
 Hingihanga. 
 
 Whakiw#, 
 
 Whakinga. 
 
 ~Kimtia, 
 
 'Kinitanga. 
 
 Whangai^, 
 
 Wh'&ngainga. 
 
 Homai. 
 
 Homa.\tanga. 
 
 Waiho, 
 
 W&ihotanga. 
 
 JLota, 
 
 ~K.oanga. 
 
 Horo, 
 
 Horonga. 
 
 Horow^tf, 
 
 Hoiomanga, 
 
 ~Rangona, 
 
 Hongonga. 
 
 "Whsioivhina, 
 
 Whuo ff/ianga. 
 
50 
 
 I 
 
 OF THE VERBS. 
 
 Utuhia, 
 
 TJtuhanga. 
 
 "Rukuhia, 
 
 Hukuhanga, 
 
 Hovihia, 
 
 TLouhanga. 
 
 Tmria, 
 
 TsLt&uranga 
 
 Tauia, 
 
 Tauanga. 
 
 Hou&, 
 
 Houtanga. 
 
 Sometimes where it is desirable to make a distinction, on 
 account of the greatness of the difference between the two 
 branches of the same root, a different form will be adopted for 
 each meaning ; e.g. 
 
 Whanaunga, is a relation : whanautanga, a birth : Kit- 
 eanga is the opportunity in which a thing may be seen ; 
 kitenga generally denotes the act of seeing. Again, 
 w&hanga is a carrying on the back, wsihinga a breaking. 
 
 13. Neuter verbs. On these but few remarks are 
 required. For the distinction between the preposition 
 t, by which they are followed, and the particle t, 
 which follows active verbs, vide i (prepositions, 10, 
 note, page 57). 
 
 That they sometimes take the passive form may be 
 seen in the illustrations bf the passive voice. In some 
 cases, also, their passives change their nature, and 
 become similar in meaning to the passives of active 
 verbs, e.g. 
 
 Nohoia tou kainga, dwell, or occupy, your farm. 
 Ka hengia mai ahau e ia, / shall be (literally J 
 ignored by him. 
 
 14. As the verbalized adjectives may be most 
 conveniently classed under this head, we shall insert 
 here a table of the principal of them : 
 
 Ea, paid for. 
 
 He, unacquainted with. 
 
 Hoha, wearied at. 
 
 Horo, stormed (as a fort, &c.) 
 
 Mahora, given (as a feast). 
 
 Makini, gapped. 
 
OF THE VERBS. 51 
 
 Mana, ratified, fyc. 
 
 Mao, ceased (as rain). 
 
 Maoa, cooked (as food). 
 
 Marere, fallen to the ground, 8fc. 
 
 Maringi, spilt. 
 
 Maru, bruised, beaten, Sfc. 
 
 Matau (sometimes with. Ngapuhi) ; e.g. E kore e 
 
 matau i a au, understood. 
 Mate, dead. 
 Mau, caught. 
 
 Mawheto, loosed (as a knot). 
 Mimiti, dried up. 
 Moti, destroyed, Sfc. (corresponding to the phrase 
 
 clean sweep, Waikato). 
 Motu, cut. 
 Mutu, ended. 
 Oti, finished. 
 
 Ongeonge (same as Hoha). 
 Pahure, passed by. 
 Pahemo, idem. 
 
 Pakaru, broken. N.B. Pakaru, is active. 
 Pareho, consumed. 
 Pau, idem. 
 Piro, departed. 
 
 Rite, completus, perfectus (sometimes). 
 Piwha, gapped. 
 Tahuri, overturned. 
 
 Toremi, sunk into (as into a bog, &c.) 
 Tu, wounded, 8fc. 
 Whanau, brought forth or born. 
 Whara, hurt (by accident). 
 Wera, burnt. 
 Ngaro, lost, destroyed, fyc. 
 Ngenge, tired. 
 Ngonga, beaten (same as Maru). 
 
 Like adjectives these words will assume the form of 
 a verb when in connection with the verbal participles. 
 
52 OF THE YER13S. 
 
 Indeed (as we have already observed), our impression 
 is, that, the more we examine, the more shall we be 
 led to think that a genuine verb is by no means a 
 common thing in Maori ; and that substantives, ad- 
 jectives, and other classes are the fountains to which 
 most of the verbs of the language may be traced. 
 
OF THE PKEPOSITIONS. 53 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Scarcely any part of Maori is more worthy of 
 attention than the prepositions. In no language, 
 that we are acquainted with, are their powers so 
 extensive. While in common with those of English 
 and Hebrew, they serve to express those relations 
 which in some languages are chiefly marked by the 
 different endings of the nouns, they extend their 
 influence still farther, and are in many instances, of 
 material importance in determining the time of the 
 sentence in which they are placed. 
 
 They are simple and compound. The simple are 
 those which, in construction, take no other preposition 
 into union with them. The principal prepositions of 
 this class are as follows : 
 
 E, by. 
 
 I, by, with, from, to, through, in, at, than. 
 
 Ki, with, to, for, at, according to, in. 
 
 Kei, at. 
 
 No, of, from. 
 
 Na, of, by, through. 
 
 Mo, for (or because of), for (possession), at, &c, 
 
 &c. 
 Ma, for, by, concerning. 
 Hei, at, for. 
 0,of. 
 A, at. 
 Ko, at. 
 To, up to. 
 
 The compound prepositions are those which, like 
 the composite of Hebrew, require one or more of the 
 
54 OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 simple prepositions to set forth their meaning. They 
 are as follows : 
 
 Runga, upon or above. 
 Raro, beneath. 
 Mua, before. 
 Muri, behind. 
 Roto, or ro, inside. 
 Waho, outside. 
 Tua, other side. 
 
 Pahaki, other side, or this side of (used in describ- 
 ing the position of an object). 
 Tai, idem. 
 Waenga, midst of. 
 Tata, near. 
 Tawhiti, far off. 
 
 The meaning and uses, however, of the above, both 
 simple and compound, are exceedingly various, and the 
 attention of the student is therefore requested to the 
 following notices respecting them * : 
 
 E, by (applied to the agent, not to the instrument), 
 is always fixed to the agent when a passive verb 
 precedes ; e.g. 
 
 Kua kainga e te kuri, was devoured by the dog. 
 Kua kitea e Hone, was seen by John. 
 Kua patua te ngaru e te ua, the ivaves were beaten 
 down by the rain. 
 
 When neuter f verbs assume the passive form, the 
 agent follows, as in regular transitive verbs, and is 
 preceded by e ; e.g. 
 
 Katahi ano a kona ka takotoria e te tupeka, now 
 for the first time has that place been laid upon 
 by tobacco now for the first time has tobacco 
 lain there. 
 
 * Many of the following remarks belong properly to the Syntax. The 
 student, however, will, we trust, find it advantageous to have the whole 
 subject placed thus in one connected view before him. 
 
 t By neuter verbs here are intended also verbalized adjectives. (Vide 
 Verbs/note, under head "Neuter.") 
 
OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 55 
 
 Kangia e te ahi, kindled upon by the fire, i.e. 
 having a fire kindled (there). 
 
 Verbal nouns, and verbs preceded by such words 
 as hohoro, oti, ahei, hei, pau, taea, taihoa, taria, &c. 
 will take e after them ; e.g. 
 
 Ngaunga e te ra, a scorching by the sun. 
 
 Kua oti te patu e au, the hilling has been finished 
 
 by me; i.e. I have killed (it). 
 E kore e ahei te hapai e ahau, the lifting cannot 
 
 be accomplished by me ; i.e. I cannot lift (it). 
 
 The following, also, are instances in which e is 
 found after the active verb after a verb, at least, 
 active in form : 
 
 Me wero e koe, you must stab it. 
 
 Me wewete e ia, he must let it go. 
 
 He mea hangd e te ringaringa, a thing made by 
 
 the hand. 
 Ka te arai mai i taku ahi e koe (a Waikatocism), 
 
 {see!) you exclude the fire from me. 
 
 1, by (follows a neuter verb, no matter whether 
 the agent be animate or inanimate). 
 
 Kua mate i a Hone, hilled by John. 
 Pakaru i te hau, broken by the tvind. 
 Ka mate ahau i te wai, / am dead by water ; i.e. 
 I am thirsty. 
 
 2. With. 
 
 Kia haere atu ahau i a koe ? Shall I go with 
 
 you ? 
 Ka riro mai i a au, will depart with me; i.e. I 
 
 shall take, or obtain it. 
 
 In this latter sentence foreigners often make mistakes, and 
 render it, ka riro mai hi a au. Wherever obtaining, receiving, 
 talcing, &c. for possession, or such like, is intended, i mostly 
 signifies the person, hi the place; as in the following 
 examples : 
 
56 OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Ka riro to kotiro % te kainga maori, your servant girl uill 
 be taken away by [the people) of the native place. 
 
 Ka riro to kotiro ki te kainga maori, your servant girl 
 will go to the native place. 
 
 If the following passage were properly and correctly 
 translated, how different would its meaning be from 
 that intended by the speaker ! Kia riro atu ratou i 
 te hunga nanakia, rescue them out from the cruel people. 
 The true meaning of the passage, as it stands, is Let 
 them depart into the power of the cruel, 
 
 3. Fhom. 
 
 /hea koe ? From whence do you (come) ? 
 
 Ki tetahi rongoa i a Hone, for some medicine from 
 
 John. 
 Inoia he ngakau hou i a la, pray for a new heart 
 
 from him. 
 
 For the difference between i and no, see the latter preposi- 
 tion, 4, page 62. Under this head may be mentioned a 
 partitive sense in which i is sometimes taken ; e.g. 
 
 Tangohia i a Hone, take some of John's. 
 
 4. To (denoting possession, used somewhat similarly 
 to the dative we find in Latin when sum is used for 
 habeo), e.g. 
 
 faau tenei kainga, this is my farm (or possession). 
 Kahore he maripi i a au, there is no hiife with me ; 
 I have no knife. 
 
 Beginners are often misled by natives and each other in the 
 use of this preposition. Such sentences as the following are 
 incorrect I a koe haere, go thou ; I a koe korero, you said. 
 It should be simply Haere ; and, Nau i korero. 
 
 5. Through (or in consequence of). 
 
 E kore e tae mai nga raupo * te ua, the raupo 
 cannot he brought here in consequence of the rain. 
 
OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 57 
 
 6. In, or at. 
 
 To tatou matua i te rangi, our Father in Heaven. 
 I hea tenei e takoto ana ? Where has this been 
 
 lying? In the cupboard. 
 E aha ana koe *' kona ? What are you doing there ? 
 
 7. At (past time). 
 
 /te aonga ake o te ra ka haere mai matou, on the 
 next day we came here. 
 
 8. At (future). 
 
 Ite ra horoi whare ka haere ake koe ki a matou, 
 on Saturday you to ill come to us. 
 
 9. Than (used in comparison) ; (vide S. adjectives, 
 
 chap, xvi.) 
 E rangi tenei i tena, this is better than that. 
 
 10. Under this head may be classed some instances 
 that cannot well be reduced to any of the above 
 rules : 
 
 E hara koe i te rangatira noku, you are not my 
 master. 
 
 E hara i a koe (a kind of jocose phrase, corres- 
 ponding, perhaps, to that of some in England), 
 you are a pretty fellow. 
 The following examples seem to be opposed to rule 
 1, and are therefore deserving of notice. They 
 are perhaps confined to Waikato : 
 
 Ka timu te tai i a tatou, the tide for us (to pull ivith) 
 will ebb. 
 
 Haere mai ki te wahi ruru * a koe, come to the spot 
 sheltered for you. 
 
 Kei te moe i ona karu, he is indulging his eyes with 
 sleep. 
 
 The student should ever be mindful of the distinc- 
 tion between the preposition i and the particle by 
 which the accusative (as it would be called in Latin) 
 is denoted. This particle has, of itself, no specific 
 meaning. 
 
58 OP THE PREPOSITIONS 
 
 It follows an active verb, whereas the preposition 
 follows the neuter, and signifies by. The uses of the 
 two words are totally opposite, as may be seen in the 
 following example : a young teacher wishing to say, 
 sin produces pain, thus expressed his sentiment : Ko 
 te kino ka whanau i te mamae. Now, whanau is not 
 an active verb. It is a verbalized adjective. It is 
 used correctly in John iii. 8 Whanau i te Wairua, 
 born of the Spirit. The sentence, therefore, that we 
 have adduced, if strictly translated, would run thus : 
 Sin is born of, or produced by pain. 
 
 KI, with (denotes the instrument) ; e.g. 
 Patua hi te rakau, beaten ivith a stick. 
 
 When used in this sense it very rarely follows neuter verbs ; 
 for example, it would not be correct to say, Ka wera i a au hi 
 te ahi, it will be burned up by me with fire. Some passive verb, 
 as tahuna, $<?., should, in this case, precede instead of wera. 
 The following form, however, is correct : 
 
 E kore e ora hi tena, will not be satisfied with that 
 
 quantity {of food). 
 E tore e oti hi tena, will not be completed with that. 
 
 Many speakers confound the instrumental character of this 
 preposition with another use of the word with, which, we 
 believe, is seldom denoted by hi. 
 
 If, for example, we had to translate into Latin the following 
 sentence, "to speak with fear " {i.e. timidly), how incorrect 
 would it be to render fear into the ablative that is used for 
 denoting an instrument ! All would see that dicere metu does 
 not express that meaning, and that cum metu dicere, or some- 
 thing to that effect, was the true rendering. So also here, 
 wherever appendage, connection, and such like is intended, hi 
 is, we believe, a preposition that is very seldom called into 
 use. We therefore disapprove of such a sentence as the 
 following : 
 
 Inoi atu hi te ngakau aroha, pray with a loving heart. 
 
 It should, however, be noticed that hi is sometimes found in 
 other uses of the word with, in which no instrumentality is 
 designed ; e.g. 
 
OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 59 
 
 Taku mahinga ki a koe, my working with you ; i.e. my 
 
 work in your service. 
 E riri ana ki a koe, is angry with you. 
 
 This last example, however, might perhaps be most correctly 
 translated at ; as in the following : 
 
 E titiro mai ana ki a koe, is looking at you. 
 
 2. To. 
 
 Ho mai ki a au, give it to me. 
 Haere hi Manukau, go to Manukau. 
 Te rohe hi a koe, the boundary to you ; i.e. for or 
 of your side. 
 
 3. For. 
 
 Tetahi ki a koe, {fetch) a [garment) for yourself 
 
 4. At (past time). 
 
 I tanumia hi reira, ivas buried there. 
 I maku ki runga hi te poti, tvas wet on board the 
 boat. 
 
 5. At (future time). 
 
 Ki te mane ka hoe mai, on the Monday ivill pull, 
 
 or paddle, here. 
 Kei roa ki reira, be not long there. 
 
 6. According to. 
 
 E ai ki tana, according to ivhat he says ; i e. as he 
 would have it, &c. 
 
 Ki ta ratou, hi taua taro na, he kikokiko, accord- 
 ing to them, as concerning that bread, it is flesh ; 
 i.e. they maintain that that bread is flesh. 
 
 In quoting the sentiments of any writer, the most appropriate 
 form for the phrase "according to" would be ki ta, as in the 
 above example. Thus the gospel according to St. Matthew, might 
 be well rendered by "ko te rongo pai ki ta Matiu; " the rule, 
 according to my opinion, is, &c, " ko te tikanga, ki taku 
 whakaaro, ko, &c." 
 
 It is used, also, where if would be employed in 
 English : 
 
 Ki te haere ahau, if I go. 
 
60 Or THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Sometimes (in Waikato) it is used pleonastically : 
 Kahore hi te matara te haere mai, it was not such 
 a distance hut he might have come. 
 
 Frequently, in consequence of the elliptical character 
 of the language, it is found in various other uses, 
 which it is difficult to reduce to rule. The following 
 are a few examples : 
 
 E noho ana koe hi te kai mau ? are you staying 
 
 from food ? 
 Te tatau hi a au, the door to me; i.e. open the door 
 
 for, or to, me. 
 Ka riro te waka hi a koe, the canoe for you will he 
 
 gone ; i.e. the canoe that is to take you will, &c. 
 Heoi ano hi a tame ko te whare, let the tent be the 
 
 only thing for the bull (to carry). 
 Taria e hoe hi a au, delay your pulling (or paddling) 
 
 for me ; i.e. wait for me. 
 Tikina atu tetahi kete, hi te kete nui, hi te kete 
 
 hou, fetch a basket, let it be a large basket, let it 
 
 be a new basket. 
 I riri ahau ki reira, thereupon, or at that thing, ivas 
 
 I angry. 
 I haere mai ahau hi a koe hi te waka hi a au, / 
 
 have come to you for the canoe for me ; i.e. to get 
 
 a loan of your canoe. 
 
 From the above sentence the student will form an idea of 
 how much the business of language is performed in Maori by 
 prepositions. 
 
 KEI, at. It denotes chiefly present time ; e.g. 
 JTeihesi ? Kei te kainga. Where is it ? At the 
 settlement. 
 
 2. At (future time). It is not unfrequently found 
 in such constructions as the following : 
 
 Kei te mane ka haere mai, on Monday he ivill come 
 here. 
 
OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 61 
 
 3. Sometimes, in animated language, it is used 
 instead of ko before the nominative case ; e.g. 
 
 Kei te ringaringa o Ngakete ! aroarohaki kau 
 ana ! the hand of Ngakete, it was all a quiver. 
 
 4. Occasionally, in Waikato, it is used in the 
 following construction : Kua riro kei te hoe mai, he 
 is gone to fetch it (the canoe') . We are aware that it 
 has been said that there should be a stop at riro, and 
 that properly the above may be said to consist of two 
 sentences, as follows : Me is gone, he is fetching it. 
 We are, however, certain that many sentences will be 
 heard in which no stop can be detected in the native 
 pronunciation. 
 
 5. Sometimes it is used in the sense of like : 
 
 Kei te ahi e toro, like fire that burns. 
 Koia ano kei te kowhatu, exactly as if it were a 
 stone. 
 
 NO, op (the sign of the possessive case). In this 
 signification he is the only article that it will admit 
 before it ; e.g. 
 
 He wanaunga no Hone, a relation of John* s. 
 
 The following construction, however, is an excep- 
 tion : 
 
 Katahi ano te potae pai no Hone, for the first 
 time the good hat of John's; i.e. what an excellent 
 hat is that of John's ! 
 
 In denoting the possessive case, no follows he, and o follows 
 te, or nga. The following sentence is incorrect : 
 
 Ano he tamariki o te Atua, as children of God. 
 
 2. Feom (that time). 
 
 No te mane i haere mai ai, he came here (last) 
 Monday. 
 
62 OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 3. Fpom (that cause). 
 
 No reira i kino ai, from that cause was he dis- 
 pleased. 
 
 In all examples of this and the preceding head, no will take 
 a past tense after it. 
 
 4. Feom (that place). 
 
 No Matamata tenei tangata, this man belongs to 
 Matamata. 
 
 There is a distinction between this meaning of no and that 
 of i (vide i, 3> page 56), which is very useful and important. No 
 signifies the place to which you belong, whether it be England, 
 Rotorua, &c. I signifies the place you have been visiting as a 
 mere sojourner. 
 
 Thus, if we were to ask a person, ll No hea koe?" he would 
 most probably reply, ii No Hauraki, no Waikato, ,, or someplace 
 of which he was a denizen; but if we were to ask, "/hea 
 koe?" he would then mention some place he had been just 
 visiting. This distinction does not seem to be so clearly 
 recognized at the northward as it is in all the central parts of 
 the island. 
 
 NA, op (the active form of no). 
 
 Na wai tena kuri ? whose is that dog ? 
 
 2. By. 
 
 Na Hone i patu, was beaten by John. 
 
 Note. Na does not in this sense take a passive after it. 
 It is not quite certain that na does, in such sentences as the 
 above, signify by. The subject will be more fully considered 
 in the Syntax (chap, xix.) 
 
 Na, in this sense, always takes i after it. The following 
 sentence is incorrect : Nana hoki Jcua tohutohu enei mea, he 
 also has appointed these things. .For na followed by Tea (vide 
 Ma. 5, Syntax, chap, xix.) 
 
 3. Through, by (what cause, instrumentality, 
 
 &c.) 
 
 Na te aha i mate ai, from ivhat did he die ? 
 
 Sometimes, in this use of it, it is followed by a 
 passive voice, with ai. 
 
OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 63 
 
 JSfa te aha i pahuatia ai ? for what cause was he 
 
 plundered ? 
 JVa te aha i meinga ai ? ivhy was it done ? 
 
 Sometimes (but rarely) it is followed by an active 
 verb : 
 
 Na te me a i tuhituhi atu ai au, the reason of my 
 writing {is because) Sfc. 
 
 4. By (place, conveyance, &c.) 
 
 Na uta, by land. 
 
 Na te kaipuke, by ship. 
 
 Na Hauraki (went) by Hauraki. 
 
 MO. N.B. Mo and ma seem to be future forms of no and 
 na in many particulars. 
 
 1. For or because of (followed most frequently by 
 a past tense, even though the meaning be present), 
 
 Mo te aha koe i aroha ai ki a te Karaiti ? why do 
 you love Christ ? 
 
 Mo te aha koe i mauahara tonu ai ki a au ? why 
 do you bear a continued grudge to me ? 
 
 Mo te tutu ki te kura i whakatikia ai, for dis- 
 obedience in school were (they) deprived of (them). 
 
 Sometimes, however, it is followed by other par- 
 ticles : 
 
 Mo te aha Ma riri kau ? why should he be angry ? 
 Mo te aha koe ka tutu nei kia au ? why are you 
 thus disobedient to me ? 
 
 2. For (denoting appropriation, use, or some action 
 passing on to the noun, or pronoun, to which it is 
 
 prefixed). 
 
 Ho mai woku, give to me (for my use). 
 Hei kainga mou, as a farm for you (or land to reside 
 upon). 
 
64 OF THE PREPOSITION'S. 
 
 He patu mdkuy a beating for me; i.e. to beat me. 
 He raka mo taku pouaka, a loch for my box. 
 Murua mai moku, take it {from them) for me i.e. 
 as a thing for me, for my benefit, use. &c. 
 
 3. Foe, (in exchange), be utu mo taku mabi. 
 Sometimes (but rarely) it is found in the following 
 
 construction : 
 
 Me aba te utu mou ? what is the payment for you 
 to he? 
 
 4. For. 
 
 Wbakawateatia be buarabi mo mea ma, char a 
 road for our friends. 
 
 5. At (future time). 
 
 Mo amua baere ai, go at a future period. 
 
 6. Concerning. 
 
 Nga kupu i korerotia ki a koe mo Tipene, the 
 report that was related to you concerning Stephen. 
 
 "We have observed mo used by foreigners in sentences in 
 which for would appear to be pleonastic, as open the door for 
 me; dress this wound for me, &c. We have no hesitation, 
 however, in affirming that mo is never used in such a con- 
 struction. 
 
 7. Used with a verbal noun to denote a preparedness, 
 8fc n for some future act ; e.g. 
 
 Mo nga baererenga ki reira ko era kai, that 
 when I go there, there may be food {ready for me) ; 
 i.e. I cultivate at that place that I may have 
 food when I visit it. 
 
 MA. The active form of mo. It implies always 
 future time. 
 
 1. For. 
 
 Ma wai tena kuri ? for ivhom is that dog ? 
 
OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 65 
 
 2. By, or, more strictly, for. 
 
 Ma Hone e patu, let it be hilled by John ; lit. 
 let the killing be for John. 
 
 3. By (what means, Sfc.) 
 
 Ma te whakapono ka ora ai, by faith shall (we) 
 be saved. 
 
 4. Sometimes it is used to denote a simple future: 
 Maka e korero, I will speak (to him). 
 
 5. It is very frequently employed in hypothetic and 
 contingent propositions ; e.g. 
 
 Ma nga Pakeha e tohe, kaua e noho, If the 
 Europeans press (to stop with them), do not 
 remain. 
 
 Mau e pai, ka haere au, If you please I ivill go. 
 
 Haria atu; wna e whakapai, mana e whaka- 
 kino, take it (to him) : (it will be) for him to be 
 pleased ivith it, (it will be) for him to be dis- 
 pleased (with it). 
 
 A very common way of denoting contingency is to 
 associate ma or na with a personal pronoun, even 
 though the latter have no direct meaning in the 
 sentence ; e.g. 
 
 He tangata Atua, ka puta mai ki a ia te kai, ka 
 whiua to tahi ki tahaki, hei whakahere i tona 
 Atua, mana ka pau i te kuri ranei, mana ka 
 pau i te poaka ranei. A man who has a God, 
 if food is brought to him (to the mem), part (of 
 it) is thrown to one side as an offering to his 
 God. (As chance may have it) it may be eaten 
 by the dog, or it may be eaten by the pig. 
 
 Nana ka nui te hau, nana ka iti, even though the 
 ivind be strong, even though it be light (still 
 does he carry on). 
 
 6. By (with reference to place or conveyance), in 
 the same sense as na (vide Na 4, page 63). 
 
 6 
 
66 OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 BA, by, same as Ma 6. 
 
 HEI, at (always future), applied to place, inten- 
 tion, fyc. 
 
 Hei kona tatari, at that place stop. 
 Hei reira korero ai, thereupon speak. 
 Hei konei, be {you) here a farewell. 
 
 2. It is often used to denote purpose, object, use, Sfc, 
 where in English we should use as, to, for, instead, fyc; 
 e.g. 
 
 Haria etahi kanga hei o mou, take some corn as 
 
 viaticum for you. 
 Hei aha tena ? Hei rewa mo te poti, tvhat is that 
 
 for? As a mast for the boat. 
 Kowai hei tiki ? ivho is to fetch (it) ? 
 
 Sometimes we hear the following : 
 Aua hei pena, do not so. 
 
 3. Occasionally (but rarely) it is used to denote 
 
 frequent action ; e.g. 
 
 Ko wai hei ruke tonu i nga riwai nei, who is 
 this that is continually throiving about the 
 potatoes ? 
 
 Note. A very strange use of this preposition is to be found 
 in some parts of the south-eastern coast ; as in the following 
 examples : 
 
 Haere koe hei rakau, go fetch a stick. 
 Haere koe hei wai, go fetch water. 
 
 On the western coast such an address would be a most 
 offensive curse. 
 
 0, of ; e.g. 
 
 Te whare o Hone, the house of John. 
 
 A, of, the active form of o. 
 Te mahi a Hone, John's ivork. 
 
 N.B. We sometimes meet with to and ta ; e.g. 
 
 Ko to Hone whare, John's house. 
 Such words, however, are clearly composed of te and o, or a. 
 
OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 67 
 
 A (different from the article a, as also from the 
 foregoing) . 
 
 At. A te mane, on, or at, the Monday (we will 
 go), &c. 
 KO. 
 
 At. Ko reira noho ai, at that place stop. 
 Ko reira korero ai, then speak. 
 
 TO, up to. The following is the only construction 
 injwhich we have heard this preposition : 
 
 To nga hope te wai, the water is up to the loins. 
 Ka to nga nma te wai nei, the ivater is up to the 
 breast. 
 
 N.B. To almost always takes a plural number after it. 
 
 Compound Prepositions. One or two examples 
 will be a sufficient illustration of all. 
 
 Rung a is capable of the following combinations : 
 I runga i, ki runga ki, ki runga i, ki runga o, no 
 runga no, no runga i, o runga o, kei runga kei, kei 
 runga i, hei runga i, hei runga hei, mo runga mo, 
 &c, &c. The first preposition in the combination and 
 the meaning of the sentence will generally determine 
 the last. 
 
 Sometimes the adverbs dke and iho (vide Adverbs), 
 as also the particles atu and mai t are postfixed to the 
 preposition to increase its force ; e.g. 
 
 E ngari tena i runga ake, that which is above (it) 
 
 is better. 
 A muri ake nei, hereafter. 
 
 A singular use of roto (or ro) may be found in the neigh- 
 bourhood of the East Cape ; e.g. 
 
 Kei ro whare, inside the house. 
 Kei ro pouaka, in the box. 
 
 A similar use of waenga may be found in all parts of the 
 island ; e.g. 
 
 Kei waenga riwai, in the midst of the potato {field). 
 Kei waenga mara, in the midst of the cultivation. 
 
68 OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 A very common and elegant use of runga is when 
 it is employed in the sense of amongst, on, or with, to 
 denote concomitancy, &c, &c, as in the following 
 examples : 
 
 I hokona e koe i runga i te he, you purchased it 
 
 on a bad title. 
 Kei runga tenei i te mahi, we are now on the 
 
 work; i.e. are busily engaged at work. 
 E karakia ana i runga i te he, he worships on 
 
 sin; i.e. while he worships God he practices 
 
 sin. 
 
 The preceding- examples suggest a good approximation to a 
 form of expression which we confess we have been unable to 
 find under the preposition ki ; i.e. with noting concomitancy 
 (vide ki, page 58), as in the following examples : " JPray with 
 faith ; " * ' love God with your whole heart. ' ' In these sentences 
 we should have no hesitation in using runga. As in the 
 sentence : 
 
 Kia haere atu te inoi i runga i a te Karaiti, let the prayer go 
 forth upon Christ. 
 
 The other compound prepositions may often be 
 rendered very useful by giving them, as in the above, 
 a figurative acceptation according with the nature of 
 the subject. One or two examples will suffice. 
 
 Tua is thus employed : 
 
 He tau ki tua, a year is on the other side; this 
 day year, what a long time (you intend to be 
 absent) ! 
 
 He mate kei tua, misfortune is on the other side ; 
 i.e. awaits you. 
 
 Kei tua o te ra tapu nei, next week. 
 
 The student should carefully remember that muri 
 and mua do not exactly correspond with behind and 
 before in English, and that tua is very frequently 
 employed to denote those words. 
 
 We have heard the following very erroneous 
 expressions from some old settlers : 
 
OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 69 
 
 Tutakina te tatau o te uroaro, shut the door of the 
 
 front ; i.e. the front door. 
 Kei muri i te whare, behind the house. 
 
 Muri and mua (as well as the substantive aroaro) 
 are chiefly employed in connection with living objects. 
 When allusion is made to the date of events, the 
 student will remember that the prepositions a, mo f 
 mo, a, hei, kei, ho, hei a, and ho a denote a future time, 
 and that no, i, and will always indicate past time. 
 
 These prepositions will sometimes be found to 
 occupy the place of verbs, substantives, and adverbs. 
 
 Sometimes we meet with other forms for denoting 
 what would be represented by a preposition in 
 English. Though their proper place belongs to the 
 dictionary, we beg the reader's permission to insert a 
 few here : 
 
 Puta noa i tera taha (make its appearance out at the 
 
 other side) ; through. 
 A taea noatia tenei ra ( arrives on to \ 
 
 or < or > this day. 
 
 A tae noa ki tenei ra ( till it reaches ) 
 A Mangapouri atu ana, even to Mangapouri. 
 I te takiwa {in the interval) ; betiueen. 
 I te ritenga atu (in the line or direction of); ante, 
 
 and contra over against. 
 Ki tona oroaro (to his front) ; before. 
 I tetahi taha ona i tetahi taha (on one side, on one 
 
 side) ; round about him. 
 Ki tera taha (to the other side) ; across (a stream). 
 
 The prefix whalca, when in union with a word, will 
 impart the meaning of towards, and change it into an 
 adverb ; e.g. 
 
 Kumea whakarunga, pull upwards. 
 Haere whaka te pa, go towards the pa. 
 
70 OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 I hoatu ai e ahau * whahaaro hi tona matua, I gave 
 it to him in consideration of his father (propter). 
 
 Kihai ahau i whakaae, i whakaaro koki ki a 
 Hone, 1 did riot assent on account of John ; i.e. for 
 John's sake. 
 
 The above form deserves, we think, the notice of our 
 missionary brethren, as supplying a good approximation to a 
 use of the word by, which we have not been able to find under 
 the preposition ki or mo, viz. when it is used in adjuration. 
 If, for example, we had to translate into prose the following 
 stanza : 
 
 By thy birth, and early years ; 
 
 By thy grief*, and sighs, and tears ; 
 
 Jesus, look with pitying eye, 
 
 Hear, and spare us when we cry, 
 
 we should feel very reluctant to use either ki or mo. For, in 
 that case, our Lord's hearing would be represented as a thing 
 to be accomplished or purchased by Himself with His birth and 
 early years a version quite foreign from the original. 
 
 We should therefore prefer something to this effect : " Wha- 
 karongo mai, tohungia hoki matou, &c, wakamaharatia tou 
 whanautanga, &C," or, " kia mahara hoki ki tou whanautanga 
 ki tou taitamarikitanga, &c, &c. " 
 
 Some, perhaps, would prefer : "I whanua nei hoki koe, i 
 taitamariki, &c. ; " neither should we object to such a form. 
 All we contend for is, that ki and mo will not answer, and that 
 they would often, in such kind of sentences, convey very 
 erroneous doctrines. Approximation to such a meaning is all 
 we can hope for ; and that is the best which differs least in 
 sense from the original. 
 
OF THE ADVERBS. 71 
 
 CHAPTEE IX. 
 OF THE ADVERBS. 
 
 The adverbs of Maori may be considered under two 
 heads, primitive and derivative. 
 
 The primitive are but few in number. 
 
 The derivative are very numerous, and may be thus 
 ranked: 
 
 1st. Those which require some preposition to 
 exhibit their application ; e.g. 
 Ki hea, no reira. 
 
 2nd. Those which are derived from words of other 
 parts of speech. 
 
 3rd. Those phrases which supply the place of 
 adverbs. 
 
 The last class is very large, Maori being deficient in 
 the variety of adverbs. Though, strictly speaking, 
 most of them cannot claim a place in this chapter, we 
 shall mention them : 
 
 1st. Because many foreigners are much perplexed 
 from not being acquainted with them ; and, 
 
 2nd. Because, being idiomatic phrases, a knowledge 
 of them is of great importance to the composition of 
 elegant Maori. 
 
 Note 1. Some of the following- adverbs might, it will be 
 seen, have been easily classified under other heads. It was 
 necessary, however, to have a classification, and it is not of 
 much consequence under which head a phrase of equivocal 
 character should be classed. 
 
 Note 2. Some of the adverbial particles are fully con- 
 sidered in the next chapter. 
 
72 
 
 OF THE ADVERBS. 
 
 Adverbs may be reduced to the following classes : 
 to those of time, place, order, quantity, quality, 
 manner, affirmation, negation, comparison, interroga- 
 tion, and intensity. 
 
 ADYEEBS OF TIME.* 
 
 presently. 
 
 Aianei, 
 
 Anaianei, 
 
 Akuanei, 
 
 Akuaina, / 
 
 Jfaanaianei, for this present occasion. 
 
 Aonaianei, ) , 
 
 T . . ' \ noio, just now. 
 inaianei, ) ' J 
 
 Tuaianei-nei-ano, at, or since this present moment. 
 
 Nonai-akenei, a few minutes, days, &c. ago. 
 
 * These adverbs of time are arranged according to their times, past, 
 present, and future. For the time of those adverbs which are compounded 
 with prepositions, see the Simple Prepositions, chap viii. The principal 
 compound adverbs are hea, alum, mua, muri, arnata, apopo, reira. They 
 are chiefly adverbs of time and place. As they are of very common use, 
 we shall give examples of their various combinations. Some of these 
 combinations ought, perhaps, more properly to be considered as belong- 
 ing to the class of substantives : 
 
 A hea? 
 Ko hea? 
 No hea ? 
 JWihea? 
 ihea? 
 Mo hea ? 
 Ma hea? 
 Ki hea ? 
 Kei hea ? 
 /hea? 
 Ohea? 
 Hei hea ? 
 A popo. 
 Ko apopo. 
 Mo apopo. 
 Hei apopo. 
 A mua. 
 Ko amua. 
 
 Ko mua. 
 No mua. 
 Na mua 
 I mua. 
 Mo mua. 
 Mo a mua. 
 Ma mua. 
 Ki mua. 
 Kei mua. 
 I mua. 
 O mua. 
 Hei mua. 
 A hea? 
 Ko ahea ? 
 Hei ahea ? 
 Mo ahea ? 
 No nahea ? 
 
 1 nahea ? 
 A muri. 
 Ko muri. 
 No inuri. 
 Na muri. 
 I muri. 
 Mo muri. 
 Ma muri. 
 Ki muri. 
 Kei muri. 
 / muri. 
 mini. 
 Ko anaianei. 
 Hei anaianei. 
 Mo anaianei. 
 / naianei. 
 naianei. 
 
 Reira ko and konei, &c, will take the same combination as muri. It 
 will be observed that some of the above adverbs take n between them and 
 the preposition. 
 
OF THE ADVERBS. 73 
 
 down to this 
 present time. 
 
 A moroki no a nei 
 A mohoa noa nei 
 A tae noa ki, | tenei ra (lit. until it is 
 
 taea noatia j arrived to this day) 
 A, e noho nei (Waikato), [lit. down 
 
 to this (time) in which (we) are 
 
 sitting] 
 Bapua Te Atua i tona hitenga ai, karangatia atu 
 
 Icei tata ana ia, seek the Lord while lie may be 
 
 found, call upon Him while He is near. 
 
 While He may be found, might also be rendered by, 
 i tona hiteatanga. 
 
 Ahea ? at what future time ? 
 Apopo, to-morrow. 
 A tahi ra, the day after to-morrow. 
 A mua, hereafter. 
 Wawe \ 
 
 E kore e taro, it will not be long I 
 E kore e roa, idem 
 
 E kore e wheau, idem / 
 
 Tenei ake [this afterwards), by-and-bye, hereafter 
 Kei taku kitenga i a ia, when I see him. 
 m , | a e nei, i n eave nenC eforward) 
 
 \ atu r hereafter. 
 
 Apopo ake nei, idem. 
 
 A muri ake nei, henceforth. 
 
 Mo a mua, at a future period, 
 
 E takoto ake nei (it lies hereafter), henceforward. 
 
 A, ake, ake, ake, for ever. 
 
 Kia mo ata te maranga, rise early (lit. let the 
 
 rising be at dawn). 
 Ko reira, on that occasion, then (future). 
 Meake, or perhaps more correctly mea ake, 
 
 presently, or, was on the point of. 
 Kia mea (ka hoki mai au ?) (shall I return ?) 
 
 after a little ivhile. 
 
74 OF THE ADVERBS. 
 
 Ka mutu, xohen finished, by-and-bye* 
 
 Ka mea, after a little interval, idem ; e.g. ka mea 
 
 ka haere ake, by-and-bye you will follow us. 
 Nonahea ? since-, or at ivhat time ( past) ? 
 iVbnanahi ) , , 
 /nanahi | V****' 
 
 JVo ) , i . i the day before yesterday (lit. from 
 I ) \ or on the other day). 
 
 - \ la short time ago (lit. from or, 
 
 j ' tahi ra atu J on the other day besides, or 
 ) ( beyond). 
 
 j > mua, formerly. 
 
 Y > nanamata, a long time ago, or in old times. 
 
 iVb-tua-iho, time out of mind. 
 Inamata (Waikato), immediately, directly, Sfc. 
 E haere ana tenei au, I will go immediately. 
 Penei i nanahi ka tae mai a Hone ma, it was this 
 
 time yesterday ichen, &c. 
 Kia penei apopo ka u, we shall land about this 
 
 time to-morroiv. 
 
 j j muri | after 10 ards. 
 Muri j -, > afterwards. 
 kt | te aonga ake, next day. 
 
 M 
 
 Ka mutu and ka mea generally denote future time, and imply a short 
 interval between the time of speaking and the act. Though the former 
 expresses an ending of something else, it does not always intend it ; for it 
 is often used when the person addressed is not engaged at anything. As 
 there is nothing in Maori corresponding exactly to the Hebraic mode of 
 phrase which is translated " it came to pass," "it shall come to pass," some 
 have adapted ka mea as a substitute, and in some cases, perhaps, it must 
 stand for want of better. There are, however, cases in which we think a 
 more correct and idiomatic form might be adopted ; viz., a simple a, or 
 nawai a, or tenei ake, &c. We, for example, should have no scruple in 
 translating the following sentences: "So it came to pass when all the 
 men of war were consumed," &c nawai a, ka poto nga tangata hapai 
 patu katoa te mate, &c. ; " and it shall come to pass if ye hearken," <fec. a 
 tenei ake, ki te whakarongo koutou, &c; " and it came to pass when he 
 heard" &c a, te rongonga o, &c. 
 
OF THE ADVERBS. 75 
 
 No te atatu, early in the morning. 
 No reira, from that time, occasion, &c. 
 I tenei ra i tenei ra (lit. this day, \ 
 
 this day) [ continually. 
 
 I te ao i te po (lit. day and night) ) 
 Tena ano, do it again. 
 
 Ka j , I 1 | waenga, at midnight. 
 
 Kahore i puta atu te kupu, kua whakatika, / had 
 not spoken (i.e. immediately, as soon as I had 
 spoken) he arose. 
 
 Haere po, go by night. 
 
 Haere awatea, go by day. 
 
 OF PLA.CE. 
 
 Ko hea (whea Waikato), whither. 
 
 Hei hea, at what place (future). 
 
 Bo hea \ o i , i 7 
 
 j--, > irom what place, iv hence. 
 
 Ki ko, thither. 
 
 No ( konei* ) from thi , nd that N lac0< 
 
 I ( kona, and kora ) K J r 
 
 Kei reira te pakaru kei reira te paru ; lit. there 
 
 the broken place there the repair ! Wheresoever 
 
 it is broken there coat with raupo* 
 Kei waho e noho ana, he is sitting outside. 
 
 Note 2. Ki reira, no reira, hei reira, &c, correspond, 
 in most cases, with ki kona, no kona, hei kona ; with this 
 difference, however, that the na and ra follow the rule already 
 noticed (page 30). 
 
 Haere iko te tokitoki, haere iho te tahutahu, 
 burn off the felled timber, and immediately as 
 soon as it has been chopped up (lit. go down the 
 chopping, go down the burning). 
 
 * For the difference between net, na, and ra, vide Pronouns, page 30. 
 
76 OF THE ADVERBS. 
 
 Ko te tahutahu ko te ko, ko te tahutahu ko te 
 
 ko, immediately as soon as, &c. 
 Tokitoki iho, ko atu, dig it immediately as soon as 
 
 it is chopped up (lit. chop downwards, dig 
 
 forwards). 
 Ora noa 
 Me i kotahi (lit. if it 
 
 had been one) \all hut, &c. 
 Wahi iti, a little bit 
 Whano 
 He mea tatau a tau te ntu, the payment is to be a 
 
 thing counted per year ; i.e. it is to be rented 
 
 yearly. 
 I tenei tau i tenei tau, yearly. 
 He tau pea mahi atu, he tau pea mahi atu, this 
 
 (manuring of the tree) is, perhaps, a work of 
 
 every year, done yearly; kei te hauhake riwai, 
 
 tulcu iho kei te kumara, (we) are now (engaged) 
 
 at digging up potatoes, afterwards (we shall be) 
 
 at the kumara. 
 Ka maha nga haerenga, many have been his goings, 
 
 i e. he has gone frequently. 
 Hoki ake ko aua kupu, hoki ake ko aua kupu, 
 
 he repeats the same words over and over again (lit. 
 
 return up, those very words, return up, those 
 
 very words). 
 Na wai-a, at length, so it was, it came to pass. 
 Tatari noa, a, ivaited a long time, 
 A oti noa, until finished. 
 Kia tae mai ra ano, until he arrives. 
 Ka tahi ano, now for the first time. 
 Ka tahi ano he mea pai, it is a good thing indeed, 
 Ka tahi au ka mea atu, then I said. 
 
 OF OEDEE. 
 
 I noho ai, he hau tetahi, he kai kore ha rua, {we) 
 remained away, 1st, (because of) the wind ; 2ndly, 
 (we) had no food. 
 
OF THE ADVERBS. 77 
 
 Ka rua aku haerenga, I have gone twice (lit. my 
 
 goings have been two). 
 Whakatepea te ko, kaua e pokapokaia, dig in 
 
 regular progression, not here and there (lit. 
 
 ordina fossionem) . 
 Me haere wakatepe te korero, relate the matter 
 
 in order (lit. the speech must go in order). 
 Hurihia ho roto, turn (it) inside out. 
 Hurihia kotuatia te papa, turn the board on the 
 
 other side. 
 Matua (Ngapuhi) first; kia matua keria, let it 
 
 be first dug. 
 Mataati (Waikato) hopukia mataatitia, caught first. 
 Kua huri hoaro te tangata wero,* the tang at a 
 
 wero has turned adversely. 
 Ho mai ki raro nei, give it down here, 
 Kei haere ki taivhiti t do not go far. 
 Whiua ki tua f throw it to the other side. 
 Neke atu ki tahaki, move to one side. 
 Kumea whakarunga, pull upivards. 
 Whakawaho, outwards. 
 Whakaroto, inwards. 
 
 A, tae noa ki te Pukatea, even to the Pukatea. 
 Haere iho, come down (to me). 
 Piki ake, climb up (to me). 
 Maka atu, thrown away. 
 Rukea ake e ahau, thrown aivay by me. 
 Maka mai, throw it here. 
 I te tahi taha i te tahi taha (lit. on^ 
 
 one side, on one side) 
 A karapoi noa (lit. until it sur- , , . 
 
 rounds) romd ahout ' 
 
 A porowhawhe noa, id 
 A potaipotai, id 
 
 * The tangata wero is the person who advances to meet a party, and 
 throws a spear at them. If, in turning to retire, he turns to the side 
 different from that from which the spear was darted, it is a huri koaro, 
 and a bad omen. 
 
78 OF THE ADVERBS. 
 
 Pehea te mataratanga ? how far ? 
 
 A, hea atu ra ano ? how far will you go ? 
 
 A, hea noa atu, one knows not ivhere. 
 
 Tautauamoa rawa tana kai, tana kai, each man 
 
 eats separately {i.e. by himself). 
 Biri tautauamoa, fighting, each by himself. 
 Kaua e ururuatia te whangai, donH feed {the 
 
 child) in rapid succession, ivithout any stop. 
 Me tvhaJcahipahipa etahi rangi (lit. let some days 
 
 be made uneven), i.e. do it every alternate day s 
 
 or at irregular periods. 
 Haere tahi, go together. 
 A, te tukunga iho {well, the letting doivn, at last, 
 
 finally) i.e. the issue of such conduct, &c. 
 E kore e ro&o-kainga, kua ruaki, he vomits imme- 
 diately, as soon as he has eaten {it). 
 I te oroMiangaanga o te ao, when first the world 
 
 was made. 
 Kati inanahi ka haere mai koe, stop yesterday 
 
 you came here; i.e. you started about this 
 
 time yesterday. 
 
 OF QUANTITY. 
 
 Ho mai Jcia maha, give abundantly. 
 
 Ho mai Jcatoa mai, give entirely, or wholly. 
 
 Tena hohi te tahi taro, give me also, or besides, 
 
 some bread. 
 Ho mai Ma iti, give me {let it be little), paululum. 
 Kia penei, let it be so much. 
 Poto rawa, consumed totally. 
 Koia ano te pai ! hoio excellent ! 
 Ano ! &c, idem. 
 Roa poto nei ano {long short), i.e. moderately 
 
 long. 
 Kahore atu, no other besides. 
 Tikina atu hold, fetch another besides. 
 I ki mai ano hohi ia, he said moreover. 
 
OF THE ADVERBS. 79 
 
 OF QUALITY. 
 
 Haere tupato, go cautiously. 
 
 Kia uaua ki te mahi, he strong to work, i.e, work 
 industriously. 
 
 Kia lialia te hoe, pull (the oar) strong. 
 
 Noho wliakaaro kore, sit 'without thought, i.e. 
 thoughtlessly. 
 
 He aha i aweke ai te mahi ? te tuku noa iho te tuku 
 noa iho, why is the icork done neatly and not 
 (rather) heedlessly (lit. and not rather let it 
 down in any way, let it down in any way). 
 
 Haere wehi, go fearfully. 
 
 Kai haere, go eating, i.e. eat as he walks. 
 
 Tu tahanga* stand nakedly, i.e. naked. 
 
 kau, idem. 
 
 Haere noa atu, go without guide, fear, &c. &c. 
 
 Tangohia huhua koretia iho, taken without cause, 
 i.e. causelessly. 
 
 Ohia noa iho au ki te patu, I struck (him) uninten- 
 tionally. 
 
 E hara i te mea totika, not intentionally. 
 
 Patua maoritia, killed intentionally, in the common 
 way, &c. 
 
 marietia, intentionally. 
 
 I tukua whakareretia, let doivn by a dash, not 
 
 with care. 
 Te kaha te tuku, donH let it down violently, i.e. do it 
 
 gently. 
 Tukua marietia, let it down gently, peaceably. 
 Kia ata tuku, gently. 
 
 Kahore ano kia ata maoa, not quite done, {i.e. in 
 
 cooking). 
 Te ata pai marie o te rangi i nanahi ! what an 
 
 exceedingly fine day was yesterday ! 
 He pupuhi noa, firing without an object. 
 
 * Tahanga is only to be found as adverb. 
 
80 OF THE ADVERBS. 
 
 Tu hau ana, stand empty, idle, &e. 
 
 Marie ano ahau i ha ere mai ai i ora ai koe, / have 
 came fortunately by which you were saved ; i.e. I 
 have corns just in time to save you, or it is well 
 that I came to, &c. 
 
 OF AFFIBMATION. 
 
 Maori is very well supplied with affirmative and 
 negative particles, all of which differ by very slight 
 shades of meaning from each other, and the uses of 
 which will be best learned by practice. 
 
 Ae,* yes. 
 Ina, idem. 
 Aana, idem. 
 Koia, idem. 
 Ae ra, idem. 
 
 Ae ra hoki. yes truly, &c. 
 Ae ra pea, idem. 
 Koia ha hoki, idem. 
 Ae ko, yes (you are correct). 
 
 Koia pea, yes, perhaps; (sometimes used ironi- 
 cally for a negative) yes indeed ! 
 
 OF NEGATION. 
 
 Negative adverbs partake of the nature of verbal 
 particles. We have given some explanation of them 
 in chap. vii. {vide paradigm of the tenses), and we 
 shall have occasion also to notice them in tbe Syntax. 
 
 * Ae and ina do not always strictly imply affirmation; e.g. Kahore , he 
 kete ? He kete ano ; ae ra, tikina atu. 18 there no banket ? There is a 
 basket ; yes, then, go fetch it. The word answer in Hebrew, and that cor- 
 responding to it in the (ireek Testament and Septuagint, affords, we 
 think, a parallel to this use of ae. It is putting a command, &c. into the 
 form of an assent to some previous senten e. N.B. Ina is often used to 
 denote energy, certainty, &c; e.g. ina ka riri au, certainly, in that case, I 
 will be angry. 
 
OF THE ADVERBS. 81 
 
 Hore, no ; hore rawa, by no means. 
 
 Kahore, not and no. 
 
 Kaho 
 
 Kao 
 
 Kihai, not. 
 
 Kore, idem. 
 
 Te, idem ; te kaha, donH do it violently. 
 
 Aua \ 
 
 Auaka f , , 
 T ^ > do not. 
 
 Kaua i 
 
 Kauaka J 
 
 Kei, do not, and take care lest, or lest. 
 
 Aua hoki (used in some parts of Waikato for 
 no, no), not at all. 
 
 E hara koe i te rangatira noku, you are not my 
 master. 
 
 Kiano (Ngapuhi), not yet. 
 
 Haunga,* not (denoting exclusion, or exception) ; 
 e.g. 
 
 Haunga tena, not that (but the other). 
 
 Aratakina mai te poaka ; haunga te mea pure- 
 pure, lead the pig here; not the speckled (but 
 the other). 
 
 Kahore haunga (Waikato), used sometimes in 
 stead of haunga. 
 
 Aua \ 
 & > I do not knoiv. 
 
 Au ) 
 
 Meho (Waikato) ) not at all (used in abrupt 
 
 Hori ) replies). 
 
 * Some, we believe, maintain that the adverb besides should be always 
 rendered by haunga. It is true that wherever exclusion or negation is 
 indicated by that word, haunga will generally answer ; e.g. E rua tekau 
 ratou, haunga nga wahine, They were twenty besides (that is, not counting) 
 the women. In the leading sense, however, of besides viz. that of more- 
 over, addition to haunga will, we are sure, seldom find a use ; as in the 
 following examples : " Besides, you know," "nobody thinks so besides 
 yourself," "there is nothing there besides the box," "besides her he had 
 no child." 
 
 7 
 
82 OF THE ADVERBS. 
 
 OF COMPAEISON. 
 
 Meatia ( *"** f lt tW 
 
 < penatia ) , ., . ,, , 
 or If > do it in that manner. 
 
 Penei, kua or a, thus (in that case, if that had been 
 
 done) he would have been saved. 
 Koia ano tena, exactly so. 
 Me mahi motuhake, work separately. 
 Haere ana ia, ko tona kotahi, he went by himself, 
 
 alone. 
 Waihoki, likeivise, also. 
 Ano kua mate, as though he were dead. 
 Me te mea, &c. (Waikato), idem. 
 Koia ano kei te wai, exactly as if it ivere water. 
 Haere a parera, walk like a duck* 
 Wakatangata nui, act manfully. 
 Wakatupu tangata, idem. 
 
 OF INTERROGATION. 
 
 Maori has many particles -which indicate interroga- 
 tion, and which correspond, in some particulars, with 
 the enclitic particles ne and num of Latin ; e.g. 
 
 E pai ana ? ne f are you inclined ? are you ? 
 Ine (Waikato) differs but little in its use from 
 ne. 
 
 Ranei, ianei, iana, and tar a are always incorpo- 
 rated into the sentence, and generally denote a ques- 
 tion ; e.g. 
 
 E pai ana ranei koe ? 
 
 * Some foreigners, we observe, give this adverb a more extensive 
 meaning than we have allowed it. In such phrases, for example, as the 
 following : " Held by the hand," "built by the hand," &c, they would 
 say, " purutia a ringaringatia," " hanga a ringaringa." We are, however, 
 decidedly of opinion that such expressions are very rare in genuine Maori. 
 "Purutia ringaringatia," "hanga e te ringa," are, we consider, in every 
 way preferable. 
 
OF THE ADVERBS. 83 
 
 Koia?*' Indeed? (when used by itself). 
 Oti, else. 
 
 Na-te-aha ? why ? 
 Me pehea ? How must it he done ? 
 Ranei is very frequently used in the sense of 
 whether. 
 
 Ianei, tana, and iara are sometimes pleonastic in 
 Waikato. 
 
 OF INTENSITY. 
 
 Pai raiva, tino tika, tino pai rawa, kino whaka- 
 harahara, tika pu, he noa iho, tini whakarere, tika tonu ; 
 all these adverbs stand for very, or some modification 
 of it ; e.g. 
 
 I hoki rawa mai koe ihea ? what is the exact, or 
 
 last, place from which you have returned ? 
 Pokuru iho, pokuru iho te namu, densely clustered 
 
 the sandflies. 
 Kahore kau, not at all. 
 Haere ra pea, go now, I say, &c. 
 Haere ra, idem. 
 
 Maori, as might be expected in the language of a rude people, 
 abounds in adverbs of intensity. We shall have to mention 
 some of these hereafter {vide Adjective, comparative degree, 
 Syntax). They sometimes elegantly supply the place of 
 verbal particles, as we shall have occasion to show when we 
 treat on the syntax of the verbs. 
 
 From the preceding table the student will see that Maori 
 has the power of increasing its adverbs to any extent, and 
 that the chief process by which a word may be converted 
 into an adverb is by placing it in immediate connection with 
 the verb or adjective. 
 
 * Koia, when part of an interrogative sentence, is, as far as we have 
 observed (although we are aware that some respectable speakers of Maori 
 have not followed the rule), almost always used in rejoinder ; e.g. I pehea 
 koia ahau ? what then did I sny ? The speaker here supposes that the 
 hearer bad disputed his statement, and uses koia. Oti is used in a some- 
 what similar construction with the meaning of else; e.g. He aha oti ? what 
 else then is it ? 
 
84 OF THE ADVERBS. 
 
 It should perhaps be here noticed 1st. That Maori inclines 
 to this mode of construction. Thus, where we should say, 
 The men and the women must all roll the log, a native would 
 most probably employ the adverb e.g. Huri tane huri 
 wahine. Such a mode of construction, though loose is, how- 
 ever, concise and emphatic. 
 
 2nd. That the adverb, in this case, admits of the same 
 variations as the verb admits of number, voice, and the form 
 of the verbal noun. For this, however, vide Syntax in 
 Adverbs. 
 
 3rd. That another process for the creation of adverbs is 
 by prefixing whalca or a to the preposition, noun, or adverb. 
 
 4th. That the compound prepositions, especially when time 
 and place are denoted, will very often take the adverbial 
 form.* 
 
 5th and last. It would be a very useful exercise for the 
 student to examine those sentences the place of which would 
 be supplied by an adverb in English, and notice the nature of 
 their construction. Some, for example, he will find rendered 
 by the verb, some by the verbal noun, some by the substantive 
 in the possessive case, some by the pronoun, &c. 
 
 * It has been objected by a learned friend that the compound preposi- 
 tions are more properly adverbs, and that in such a sentence as " kei roto 
 i te whare," i is the governing preposition, and roto is an adverb. We 
 submit, however, that if a preposition be "a particle denoting the relation 
 of one substantive to another, then roto is a preposition, for it clearly 
 indicates a local relation between roto (or i roto, if you please) and the 
 thing spoken of. Those who feel sceptical on this point, we would beg to 
 examine the composite prepositions of Hebrew. For example, the Hebrew 
 preposition under (tahath) is recognized as a preposition by grammarians, 
 even though it may require the prepositions from and to in combination 
 with it to exhibit its meaning. So also, in English, such prepositions as 
 according to, out at, out of, &c, are not considered as disfranchised by 
 the supplementary preposition annexed to them. At the same time it is 
 to be noted that where there is a break between the compound preposi- 
 tion and its supplement, then the former must be considered as an adverb ; 
 thus, in the sentence, "Kei raro, kei te whare," "it is below, it is in the 
 house;" raro is here, as it is in English, an adverb joined to is, the line 
 of connection being broken by a comma. In such a construction as this, 
 the same preposition that precedes the compound preposition (or rather, 
 in this case, the adverb) must also follow it. 
 
OF THE PARTICLES. 85 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 OF THE PARTICLES. 
 
 We have thought it better to devote a separate 
 chapter to the consideration of the following particles 
 of Maori; first, because those words, though they 
 strongly partake of the nature of adverbs, are yet 
 sometimes used as conjunctions ; secondly, because 
 we are of opinion that a distinct consideration of them 
 will be the best way to impart clear and comprehensive 
 views of their nature. 
 
 An accurate acquaintance with these epea pteroenta (" winged 
 words") of discourse is in most languages of very difficult 
 attainment : but in Maori, particularly, do they require our 
 study ; that language not conceding to the verb the same 
 prominent place that it occupies in other languages, and rather 
 (as we have already observed) transacting the business of pre- 
 dication by pronouns, particles, &c. 
 
 They are mainly used for embellishing, defining, and 
 impressing a thought, and may, with the prepositions, be justly 
 denominated, The hinges of Maori. 
 
 To enumerate them all would be an endless task, and 
 perhaps a useless one ; for, in no part of Maori is there so great 
 a discrepancy in the various districts. The following, we 
 think, are the most general in use, and most deserving of 
 notice ; Atu, mai, ake, iho, ai, ano, ra, koa, u, hoki, kau. 
 
 Atu and mai are, in most respects, exactly opposite ; 
 atu indicates an emanation forth or action from, the 
 latter an approach or direction towards, the speaker. 
 
 E kore e rongo mat, will 
 
 Kahore ahau e rongo atu 
 I do not hear forth. 
 
 not hear towards (me 
 or us). 
 E rangona mai ranei 
 tatou ? shall we be 
 heard towards (us)? 
 
86 
 
 OF THE PARTICLES. 
 
 Tu atu, stand out of my 
 way. 
 
 Tikina atu, go there and 
 bring here, i.e. fetch 
 thence. 
 
 E tatari atu ana matou ki 
 a koe, we are loaiting 
 forth to you. 
 
 E kore ahau e kaha atu, 
 I shall not be strong 
 forth, i.e. shall not be 
 able to take it there. 
 
 Kati mat i kona, stand 
 towards me there where 
 you are. 
 
 Tikina mai, fetch hence. 
 
 Mau maty ano, for you 
 truly hither, i.e. it is 
 for you to strike the first 
 bloiv, &c. 
 
 Note. Atu will sometimes lose its peculiar meaning after a 
 verb {vide Verbs, S) . It will also occasionally stand for other : 
 Tera atu ano, that is another ; i.e. there are other besides. 
 
 Ake and Iho. The general uses of ake and iho are, 
 of the former up, and of the latter down, to the 
 speaker : 
 
 Haere ake, come up (to us). 
 Heke iho, come down (to us). 
 
 E tu iho, he stands up there, i.e. down towards (us). 
 Te mea e ngangautia ake, the thing about which 
 there is that contention below, lit. is contended up 
 towards (us). 
 
 Sometimes they will stand, the one for up, the other 
 for doivn, to the object of the action ; e.g. 
 
 E kore ahau e roa ake, I am not tall enough to 
 
 reach tip (to it). 
 Ho ake ki a ia, give it up to him. 
 Pataia iho te mate, ask down (to him) his sickness. 
 
 Ake and iho will sometimes denote propriety, pecu- 
 liarity, self-existence, &c, e.g. 
 
 Maku ake ano, for myself alone. 
 
 Mona iho ano tena, that is for himself alone. 
 
OF THE PARTICLES. 87 
 
 E hara i te toka tu ake, not a rock that has stood of 
 itself. 
 
 Ake will sometimes signify the other side of the 
 speaker, whether it be before, behind, to one side of, 
 above, below, &c. ; e.g. haere ake to a hearer in front 
 will mean, come behind me ; to a person behind, it will 
 signify, come to my front. 
 
 N.B. Iho does not seem to have any corresponding opposite 
 to this meaning of ake. 
 
 Sometimes, also, ake is employed to designate a 
 motion by another towards some place with which the 
 speaker may be in connection ; e.g. 
 
 Ka mea, ka haere ake ki Waitemata, follow me by- 
 
 and-bye to Waitemata. 
 He aha te tikina ake ai he ti ma te turoro nei ? 
 
 why has not tea been fetched (from my residence) 
 
 for this patient ? 
 E puta mai, ko karanga ake ki a au, when he 
 
 comes you will call to me {who am now going aivay). 
 
 Under these two last rules, should, perhaps be 
 mentioned the following examples : 
 
 Tangohia ake te ngarara i taku tuara, take the 
 
 insect off my back. 
 Ma koutou e urunga ake, do you of the bow of the 
 
 canoe steer, i.e. so paddle that the stern, where I 
 
 am, may be directed rightly. 
 
 Note 1. There are other subordinate meanings of alee and 
 iho, of which examples have been given under the adverbs, 
 and which do not, we think, require any further notice. 
 
 Note 2. Ake and iho are often used after verbs, in a manner 
 somewhat corresponding to that of the verbal particles {vide 
 Verbs S.) 
 
 Ai is a particle of great use. It is chiefly employed 
 as a substitute for the relatives ivho, which, what, and 
 
88 OF THE PAKTICLES. 
 
 has reference to the time, place, manner, cause, means, 
 intention, &c. of an action ; as in the following 
 examples : 
 
 No te ra horoi whare i haere mai at, started for 
 
 here on Saturday. 
 I ton a kitenga ai, when it was seen. 
 Te whare i moe ai ia, the house in which he slept. 
 Te peheatanga i meatia ai, the way in which it 
 
 xoas done. 
 Te take i patua ai, the cause for which he ivas beaten. 
 Ma te aha e ora ai ? by what means be saved ? 
 I tuhituhi ai au nau hoki i utu i ena riwai, I 
 
 have written to you because you paid for the other 
 
 potatoes. 
 
 Occasionally, however, it is heard as a simple 
 expletive; e.g. 
 
 I mua ai, formerly. 
 
 2nd. It is employed with the verbs to denote a 
 sequence, and, occasionally, an opposition of action, 
 and might be translated by " and then" "to," and 
 sometimes " but." 
 
 Haere, ka hoki mai ai, go, and then return. 
 
 Haere ki reira noho ai, go there to stop. 
 
 Kua hereherea, noho ai, kawea atu ana ki a te 
 Paki, she ivas enslaved, and remained such for 
 some time, then ivas carried to Paki. 
 
 Ko te pa ano tera ; noho ai ia ki Horotiu, that 
 indeed is his village ; but he dwells at Horotiu. 
 
 Sometimes, especially at Taupo, and, we understand, at the 
 East Cape, ai is often used where the sequence or opposition of 
 action is but faintly, if at all, expressed. The following is 
 correct in Waikato: E pa, kei hea tetahi wahi mo matou? 
 
OF THE PARTICLES. 89 
 
 kokoa kotoatia ai e koe te whenua nei, friend where is there a 
 portion for us ? why, you have monopolized the whole of the land. 
 
 Note 1, The place of ai may be often supplied by nei, na t 
 or ra ; e.g. koia ahau i haere mai nei. 
 
 Note 2. Ai is often erroneously omitted and erroneously 
 introduced by foreigners, and those who wish to propound a 
 statement accurately will do well to observe its use. 
 
 For ai, as used in connection with the verbal particle and 
 the verbs, see Syntax. 
 
 Ano. This is a particle much used in assertions 
 and replies. Its meaning will vary with that of the 
 word to which it is postfixed. 
 
 Indeed ; Tenei ano nga tangata o toku kainga te 
 
 mahi nei i te kino, Here truly are the people, 
 
 &c. 
 Ko ia ano te tikanga o te aroha, id demum est 
 
 firma amicitia. 
 Naku ano taku, mine is my own. 
 Kati ano, stop I say {or leg of you). 
 Also ; No Waikato ahau, no Rotorua ano, I am 
 
 from Waikato, from Rotorua also. 
 Only; Kotahi ano taku, one only is mine. (Analce 
 
 would not here be used.) 
 Immediately ; akuanei, nei ano, now, instantly. 
 Same ; Ko nga kau ano nga kau, they are the very 
 
 same cows. 
 Different; He tangata ano tena, that belongs to 
 
 another person. 
 Again or another ; Tikina ano, fetch another. 
 Same as ; Ano e moe ana, as if he were sleeping. 
 Self; Mana ano, for himself 
 I whakaae mai ranei ? I whakaae ano. Was 
 
 he willing ? He was willing. 
 
 It is used in combination with other particles, as 
 follows : 
 
 Heoi ano, that is all. 
 Ano hoki, also. 
 
90 OF THE PARTICLES. 
 
 Ra ano, until. 
 
 "Nei ano, this is it, or here it is, &c. 
 
 Koia ano ! how {fine, 8fc. ) / 
 
 A e noho nei ano ? and is he still here ? 
 
 Ano ra, whakarongo mai, (yes or no); but listen to 
 
 me; i.e. I do not deny ivhat you say ; only listen 
 
 to me ? 
 Ko tena ano ra, that one I say, or that also. 
 
 Ano, in the beginning of sentences, seems with 
 Ngapnhi to admit of a wider application than what is 
 generally heard in Waikato ; e.g. Ano ka tae ki te 
 whare, and when he came to the house. 
 
 N.B. JVo, also, with the same people, seems to admit of a 
 somewhat similar application. 
 
 Ra is a particle corresponding in its use with nei 
 and ra, and is frequently used to suj)ply the place of 
 the relative which ; e.g. 
 
 I kite ra koe, which you saw. 
 
 There ; e takoto mai ra, it lies there. 
 
 It is sometimes used, in commands and energetic 
 sentences, for then. 
 Haere ra, go then. 
 Heoi ana ra, that is all about it then. 
 
 Often in replies : E pai ana ? Ae ra. 
 
 Koa is a particle used mostly in correcting, &c, 
 another speaker or oneself : 
 
 E pa, e he ana koa koe, 0, my friend, you are 
 
 wrong. 
 Aana koa, yes (you are right). 
 
 It is difficult to define its meaning in the following 
 phrases : 
 
 Tena 
 & } koa, show it here, or give it to me. 
 
 Na 
 
OF THE PARTICLES. 91 
 
 E hara koa (iana or ianei or iara) ra ? what else ? 
 
 E ngaro hoki koa iana, &c, that, I confess, is 
 {right, wrong, &c). 
 
 Ra hoa ka kai iho ia i te ata o tana kai (even 
 though the offering be devoured) still {does the 
 god) eat the shadow of the food ; yet, nevertheless. 
 
 Uia often used as a mere expletive. Sometimes it 
 has force in exculpatory sentences ; e.g. 
 
 E taea te aha u ana i te mamae ? how could the 
 poor fellow help it from the pain? 
 
 Note. Though often used as an expletive, u will not, how- 
 ever, admit of being- thrust into every sentence. Some foreigners 
 seem peculiarly fond of using it. The following use of it is, at 
 least in Waikato, erroneous : "Ahe tangata nui hoki a Hone, 
 he rangatira hoki u a ratou." 
 
 Hoki. Some of the uses of hold have been inserted 
 under the adverbs. We shall give a brief view of the 
 principal of them here. Its more general uses are 
 also, for, because : 
 
 He mea hold ka tae mai ahau, in consideration of 
 
 my having come. 
 Koia hoki, yes truly (lie is right), &c. 
 Ina hold (the same as mei of Waikato), viz. as 
 
 you may judge from. 
 Kahore ano i tae mai, ina hold te pu, te rangona, 
 
 he has not arrived, as we may judge from the gun, 
 
 its not being heard. 
 Nei hold, and na, or ra, hoki ; Hopukia te poaka. 
 
 Kua mau ra hoki, Oh, it has been caught. 
 Kati te tohe, kua riro atu nei hoki te utu, cease 
 
 importuning, inasmuch as the payment has been 
 
 given. 
 
 This form we approve much of for expressing the 
 following : " for the death of the Lord Jesus Christ," 
 kua mate nei hold, &c, i.e. inasmuch as, &c. 
 
92 OE THE PARTICLES. 
 
 Ki te titaha hoki ra, well then {if you won't give 
 
 that), give me an axe. 
 Ho mai hoki, give it, I say. 
 Kau ; Riri kau, angry without cause. 
 E ngenge ana koe ? Ngenge kau ! Are you tired ? 
 
 Why should I be tired? (lit. tired at nothing /) 
 E mail kau ana te taura, is barely fastened, i.e. 
 
 it has only the name of being fastened. 
 Ka mahi kau ahau, work for nothing. 
 Tu kau, stand idle, naked, &c. 
 
OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. 93 
 
 CHAPTEE XI. 
 OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 Me, and; Te kete me nga riwai, the basket and the 
 potatoes. 
 
 While ; Me te hongi, me te tangi, and saluting, and 
 crying ; i.e. while saluting he is crying. 
 
 With ; * E mahi ana me te whakaaro ano ki te utu, 
 he is working, and is at the same time mindful 
 of payment. 
 
 Haere tahi me ia, went together with him. 
 
 As ; Me kontou hoki i wakarere i to koutou kainga, 
 as ye also left your country. 
 
 ( ) 
 
 Me I & > mua, as formerly. 
 (to ) 
 
 Me mua,f idem. 
 
 As far as ; Me konei, me "Waitemata, as far as from 
 
 here to Waitemata. 
 If; Me he mea a paiana, if he is willing. Me i kahore 
 
 koe, if it had not been or you. 
 Ma, and (a numeral conjunction). ( Vide Numerals, 
 
 page 25.) 
 Met (Waikato), inasmuch as, as you may judge from. 
 
 (Vide hoki. Same as ina hoki of Ngapuhi). 
 
 * This particle will often supply a good substitute for with, when it 
 denotes connection, &c, a meaning which we believe to be but seldom 
 expressed by ki (vide ki, Prepositions). 
 
 t Some foreigners, we observe, use me i mua ; this, however, is de- 
 cidely erroneous. 
 
94 OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 Koia, therefore; koia i riri ai, therefore ivas he angry. 
 
 JVa and a. These particles are of very great use in 
 Maori. They correspond very closely with particle 
 vahv of Hebrew, and may be recognized in our 
 translations as occupying the place of and, then, there- 
 fore, but, &c. "It was," said Gesenius, in vahv, "a 
 part of the simplicity of ancient language to mark 
 merely the connection of ideas, without expressing 
 those nice distinctions of thought which are desig- 
 nated by the use of causal, adversative, disjunctive, 
 and other conjunctions. The prefix vahv retains this 
 variety of signification, though other more definite 
 conjunctions are also in use." This is precisely the 
 case with Maori. 
 
 Ina, ua {ana, Waikato), when; Ina korero ahau, 
 when I speak. 
 
 Or, if (occasionally), chiefly in cases in which con- 
 tingency is attached to when : 
 
 Ma wai e whai, ina tere ? who is to follow it (the 
 canoe) if it drifts ? 
 
 Heoi (Ngapuhi) and heoti (Waikato) is a particle which 
 corresponds sometimes with a and na in its uses. It generally, 
 however, implies opposition, and might be translated by but, 
 &c. Sometimes, also, it has the meaning of so, then, and some- 
 times (particularly in Waikato) it is, in the end of sentences, 
 redundant. 
 
 Ara, and then, &c. ; e.g. 
 
 Ara te meatanga atu a Hone, and then John 
 replied. 
 
 Note. Ara is very often used as an adverb for videlicet, 
 forsooth, &c. 
 
 Mo ) 
 
 ^r I reira. 
 
 ^ I for that cause, therefore.* 
 
 * The learned student will, however, notice that these words, as well 
 as koia, are only prefixed to conclusions which are the natural and neces- 
 
OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. 95 
 
 Mona i tahae, because he stole. 
 
 Inake ano; Inake ano i kore ai e tupu, a good 
 
 reason indeed why it did not grow {thence, 
 
 from that cause). 
 
 Ina whai ano (Waikato), idem. 
 
 Otira \ 
 
 Otiraia 
 
 la V but, and nevertheless. 
 
 Raia I 
 
 Atiia (Waikato) J 
 
 Huatu \ 
 
 Kaore, and kahore 1 All these belong to the 
 
 Tena ko tenei adversative class, and 
 
 Tena ) , denote but, with some 
 
 Ko j sometimes \ peculiarityi howev er, of 
 
 E ngari ) , I the meaning and con- 
 
 E rangi J sometmes struction which can only 
 E ngaro I he learned by practice. 
 
 E ao ia J 
 
 Ahakoa, although ; Ahalcoa roa noa te tohe e kore 
 
 e marere, although you importune long, it will 
 
 not be granted. 
 
 Note. Ahakoa will almost always precede in the sentence. 
 
 wry effect of a preceding proposition. For example, we might use mo 
 reira, &c, in such a sentence as the following : "Men are sinners, there- 
 Sore men are exposed to the wrath of God ;" because the preceding propo- 
 sition is clearly a cause of the latter. 
 
 We could not, however, use any of them in such propositions as the 
 following : " The Tohungas are liars, therefore the New Zealander listens 
 to liars ;" " the sun shines, therefore the sun is a luminous body ;" " man 
 is an animal, therefore man has sensation ;" because it would not be true 
 to *ay, that, because the Tohunga is a liar, he is therefore listened to ; 
 because the sun shines it is luminous ; or, that man having sensation is 
 caused by his being an animal. 
 
 Wherever, then, the connection with the preceding proposition is either 
 accidental or abstract, we must have recourse to other words, such as na, 
 a, ra, pea, &c, and these are largely used in our translations (vide Mat. v. 
 37, xxiv. 42, and N. T. passim). 
 
 The affirmative particles ina and ae ra will often supply a good sub- 
 stitute for therefore, and will be logically correct. For the conclusion is 
 the proposition that we in principio affirm to be true, and having proved 
 it, we then authoritatively pronounce it to be so. (Vide our remarks on 
 ae, &c, note, under Adverbs of Affirmation.) 
 
96 OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 Following are a few examples of phrases which 
 supply the place of conjunctions : 
 
 Ki te kahore e pai, if he is not pleased. 
 
 Ki te wa haere, if you go. 
 
 Ka pa nau, if it had been yours. 
 
 Ka pa tao (Ngapuhi), or tau (Waikato) na tatou, 
 
 if it had been we that had done it. 
 Patu, kaaha? If I beat him, what better will 
 
 he be ? lit. beat him, what is (effected ?) 
 I tika ano i a au, titiro ana koe wahia iho, / had 
 
 put it all to rights, and you go and break it in 
 
 pieces. 
 E korerotia atu ana, e whakatika mai ana, he is 
 
 spoken to, he rises up, i.e. lohen I speak to him, 
 
 he rises up against me. 
 Pera hoki me Hana e whakatoi nei, just as Hana 
 
 teases. 
 Mana ka tika, mana ka he, even though (no matter 
 
 whether) it he right or wrong. 
 Ko reira, then. 
 
 The particle ai is very useful in supplying the 
 place of conjunctions. ( Vide page 88.) 
 
OF THE INTERJECTIONS. 97 
 
 CHAPTEE XII. 
 OF THE INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 Maori abounds in interjections. The following are 
 the most common. It will be seen in this part of 
 speech that there is a considerable variation in the 
 different tribes. 
 
 INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 For calling to another person near at hand, Ou ! Ou ! 
 
 For reply to recall, (in a falsetto tone). 
 
 For drawing attention to statements, things, &c, &c. 
 
 Inana ! irara ! ira ! (Rotorua) . 
 Aiaiai ! (Taranaki). 
 Here ! ere ! nene ! re ! (Waikato). 
 Nana! (Ngapuhi). 
 
 For exciting attention, rara ! (Waikato). 
 Disapprobatory E, e ! He ! hi ! ha ! aeha ! arara. 
 Ata ! (Ngapuhi). Ae! 
 
 Exclamations made when it has been found that 
 the speaker was correct (corresponding to ah, you see / 
 yes, to be sure, &c. ) Na ra nei ? Arara ! haka ! 
 (Waikato), aheiha (Ngapuhi), ae ra hoki. That 
 expressive of gratification at some misfortune having 
 befallen another, Kaitoa ! 
 
 Of salutation to visitors Haere mai, haere mai ! 
 Tauti mai (Waikato), nau mai (Rotorua). 
 
 Salutation of one meeting another, Tena ra ko koe ; 
 
 or, Tena koe ! (lit. that is you). 
 In reply to a salutation, Ko koe ra ! It is you ! 
 OffareivellHei konei; stop! Haere, go ! 
 
 E noho ! ne ? Remain ! Will you ? 
 
 8 
 
98 OF THE INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 Of wonder, Aue ! Eue ! (Waikato), Taukiri e ! A! 
 He inati ! (Waikato) . 
 
 Besides these, there are phrases which are often 
 used as interjections ; e.g. 
 
 Ka tae taku matua, &c. ! Bravo, my father, &c, 
 
 corresponding to our thank you. 
 Ka tae he mamahi mau ! ivhat heavy work for you. 
 Tauhou, ki a Hone ! (lit. stranger to John /) Oh yes, 
 
 Mr. John. 
 Ka mahi a Hone, idem. 
 
 Maori delights in inter jectional and ironical sen- 
 tences, and the student who desires to be a good 
 speaker should pay them much attention, and study 
 also to catch the tone of voice, &c. 
 
 Some who have not noticed them have turned an 
 exclamation into a question, and thus altered the 
 meaning of the sentence, " How many pigs of John 
 have better food than I ? " we have heard thus traas- 
 lated : E hia ranei nga poaka a Hone he pai ke ta 
 ratou kai i taku, &c. ? The translation here obviously 
 differs from the original. It should have been, Ano 
 te tint, or tint noa iho, or ka tae te tini, or kia tini t na 
 (or ano), te tini, or he tini nga poaka, &c- 
 
 And here we may observe that, in translating from 
 another tongue into Maori, it would be perverting all 
 use of language to render by merely a verbal corres- 
 pondence, without any regard to the meaning; and 
 that, in these idiomatic phrases, it would be best, 
 unless we wish to establish the maxim of the French 
 statesman,* " that language was merely intended to 
 conceal our feelings," to make our author employ 
 those corresponding expressions in Maori which he 
 would most probably have used had he been speaking 
 in that language. 
 
 We may observe, in conclusion, that Maori has no 
 
 * The Abbe" Talleyrand. 
 
OF THE INTERJECTIONS. 99 
 
 good form for such optative interjections as ivoidd that, 
 &c. There is, it is true, a kind of substitute ; but it 
 cannot be expressed by our present alphabet. It is 
 formed by a sharp smack of the tongue against the 
 palate, and na pronounced after it. The best form, 
 for the present, is, perhaps, me i % with a peculiar tone 
 of voice ; e g. Me i kite ahau ia ia ! If I had but seen 
 him ! or, would that I had, &c. 
 
100 OF THE SYNTAX. 
 
 CHAPTEE XIII. 
 
 OF THE SYNTAX. 
 PRELIMINARY REMARKS. 
 
 Before we proceed to the consideration of the 
 Syntax of Maori, it will be necessary 1st, to explain 
 some terms which we shall be obliged to employ; and, 
 2nd, to make a few remarks on the general features 
 of Maori sentences. Some further remarks on this 
 subject we shall reserve till we come to treat on the 
 verbs. 
 
 The subject of a proposition is that concerning 
 which anything is affirmed or denied. The predicate 
 is that which is so affirmed or denied of the subject. 
 Thus, in the following sentence, Kua mate a Hone, 
 John has died, Hone is the subject, and mate is the 
 predicate. 
 
 Note. We can scarcely recognize the verbal particles as 
 copulas. We believe that their exclusive use is to denote time. 
 
 Propositions, or sentences, we divided into simple 
 and compound. Another divison is here necessary 
 viz., into complex and incomplex. An incomplex proposition 
 is that whose subject and predicate are simple terms ; 
 e.g. He hoiho tenei, this is a horse. 
 
 A complex proposition is that which contains some 
 qualifying, or otherwise modifying, term in connection 
 with either subject or predicate ; e.g. I mate a Hone 
 hi reira. Ki reira here qualifies the predicate mate. 
 He tokomaha nga Pakeha i Akarana, many are th 
 foreigners in AucMand. Nga Pakeha i Akarana is the 
 subject, and tokomaha the predicate. 
 
OF THE SYNTAX. 101 
 
 He aroha no te Atua i ora ai tatou. This, placed in 
 due order, is " I ora ai tatou, he aroha no te Atua," 
 we having been saved was a love of God. Here, / ora at 
 tatau is the subject. 
 
 Ko tou utu tena mo to hanganga i te whare ? Is 
 that your payment for your having built the house ? Here, 
 we conceive, ho tou utu mo to hanganga i te whare is the 
 subject, and tena the predicate. 
 
 In examining the nature of Maori propositions, the student 
 will soon notice that they are characterized by a remarkable 
 brevity and abruptness, as well as by the frequent occurrence 
 of ellipses. As a New Zealander is generally unequal to a 
 train of consecutive thought, so also is his language inadequate 
 to exhibit with accuracy the various processes of the civilized 
 intellect, such as comparing, abstracting, &c, or indeed any 
 ideas beyond the simple and monotonous details of his daily life. 
 It is, if we may so speak, an animated sketching, intended for 
 general effect, the more delicate lines being but faintly touched. 
 
 The student has already seen that Maori is defective in par- 
 ticles of illation, comparison, and copulation. The want of a verb 
 substantive, which is so useful as a copula in other languages, 
 will often, where accuracy is desired, cause both clumsiness and 
 obscurity of construction. 
 
 The process by which a New Zealander constructs his sen- 
 tences is very similar to that of a child who is just beginning to 
 speak. For example : If the latter wishes to express, " Is that 
 a horse?" M Give me some bread," he will must probably say, 
 "A horse that?" ''Me bread." He has the ideas of himself 
 and bread, and, by pronouncing the one in immediate succession 
 after the other, attempts to convey the idea of their mutual con- 
 nection. So also will Maori, when it wishes to express the de- 
 pendence of two or more ideas on each other, place them in close 
 connection, as distinct existences, and leave the hearer to de- 
 duce their intended relations. From hence it may, a priori, be 
 collected 1st. That Maori inclines to the substantive form. 2nd. 
 That it will have a peculiar tendency to the indicative mode of 
 statement. 3rd. That it delights in short sentences. 4th. That 
 it will often, in consequence of the frequent occurrence of 
 ellipses, present constructions which will appear strange to the 
 student of only polished languages, and even occasionally seem 
 to defy analysis. 5th. That the clauses of the sentence will, 
 like its words, be often thrown together without any connecting 
 particles, and that we shall often notice in their construction a 
 frequent occurrence of epanorthosis. 
 
102 OF THE SYNTAX. 
 
 On some of these heads we shall have to remark hereafter. 
 The last -mentioned feature is, however, of such importance in 
 the investigation of some of the difficult points of Maori that 
 we must beg the student's leave to being it here prominently 
 before his notice. 
 
 JEpanorthosis is a figure of frequent occurrence in 
 all languages, but particularly in those of the East. 
 It is u the qualifying a former clause by the addition 
 of another;"* e.g. Ka tae te hohoro o ta tatou kia, 
 te pau ! what great haste our food has made (I mean) 
 the being consumed. Here te pau is a clause quali- 
 fying the preceding. E rua tahi enei, he roa kau, 
 there are two here, nothing but long. Ringihia mai, 
 kia nohinohi, pour me out some, let it be little (i.e. 
 pour me out a little) ; e rite tahi ana ia kia koe, 
 te ahua, he is like you (I mean) the countenance ; 
 no reira a Ngatihau i tino mau ai, te karakia ai, that 
 was the cause why Ngatihau were quite established, 
 (I mean) the not adopting Christianity. I riri au 
 ki a ia, kihai net i whakaaro, I was angry with him, 
 (I mean) he did not exercise thought in that matter. 
 Ko te tangata tenei, nana nga kakano, this is the man, 
 his are the seeds (i.e. this is the person whose are, 
 &c.) He aha tua e mea, what is yours (actively) 
 (I mean) are doing ? i.e. what are you doing ? Haere 
 ana Hone, me tana hoiho. Ka puta pea tena ki raro, 
 e tihore ana. So John started and his horse. He has 
 perhaps reached to the northward (I mean) is peeling 
 {i.e. going along at a peeling, or rapid, rate.) 
 
 * "Est sui ipsius quasi vevocatio, qua id, quod dictum est, e vestigio 
 corrigitur." Glass, edit. Dathe, page 1,350. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 103 
 
 CHAPTER XIV. 
 SYNTAX OE THE ARTICLE. 
 
 1. Ko is never used before appellatives without 
 either, te, te tahi, and its plural e tahi, or one of the 
 possessive pronouns intervening, and it is almost 
 always found to occupy the first place in the sentence ; 
 
 ko taku tamaiti, this is my child. 
 ko e tahi kua kitea, some were seen. 
 
 2. In this position, a very common use of it is to 
 imply the verb substantive. 
 
 3. The article he, it will be seen, does not require 
 its help for such a purpose ; e.g. he rakau tenei, this 
 is a tree ; he mate toku, a sickness is mine, i.e. I am 
 sick. 
 
 4. All the functions of a (vide page 13) are per- 
 formed by ko, when the noun, &c, to which it is pre- 
 fixed, precede in the sentence ; e.g. 
 
 Ko koe te haere, you are the person that is to go. 
 Ko runga kau i kainga, the tops only were eaten. 
 
 5. Sometimes it will be found in other parts of the 
 sentence (a) when the terms of which the sentence 
 is composed are convertible,* 4 or are intended, at least, 
 to be represented as similar ; e.g. ko te timunga atu 
 o konei ko te pakeketanga o waho, the ebbing of the tide 
 from here is low ivater outside. 
 
 Me he mea ko Pahuru ko Ngakete, if Pahiru had 
 been Ngakete, &c. 
 
 * Convertible terms, we need not remind the learned reader, are those 
 the meaning of which is so similar that they may be substituted one for 
 the other. 
 
104 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 Ko au ra ho ia, 1 and he are (one). 
 
 (b) Sometimes, also, when there are two subjects 
 of which the same thing is affirmed, ho will be pre- 
 fixed to both ; e.g. 
 
 Ko Kukutai ho te Wherowhero, rite tahi raua, 
 Kuhutai and Wherowhero, they are equal both of 
 them. 
 
 6. It will be seen in the above example that ho will 
 sometimes represent and ; e.g. e takoto nei ho te pihi 
 ho te poro, it lies here, both the piece and the end (of 
 the bar of soap). 
 
 7. Very frequently, also, ho may be denominated 
 "the article of specification and emphasis ; ,: e.g. 
 Nohu tena paraikete, that blanhet is mine ; ho toku 
 paraikete tena, that is my blanhet. The former of 
 these two sentences implies that the blanket is his 
 property ; the latter denotes the same thing, with 
 some further specification, as being, for example, one 
 that had been previously described, ivorn, &c. 
 
 Again, ho Hone i haere, John went. 
 
 I haere a Hone, idem. 
 
 Here also there is, we think, a difference. The latter 
 sentence merely says that John went ; the former that John, as 
 contradistinguished from someone else, was the person who went ; 
 literally, it was John {who) went. 
 
 8. Sometimes also, in animated description, ho will 
 follow the verb ; e.g. na ka hinga ho Haupokia, na ka 
 hinga ho Ngapaka, then fell Haupohia, then fell Ngapaha. 
 
 9 Ko will generally be prefixed to the subject,* e.g. 
 ho ta te tangata kai he poaka, he riwai, he aha, he aha, 
 the food for man is pork, potatoes, et ccetera, et caetera ; 
 
 * The learned student will here see that Maori has, in this respect, the 
 advantage over Hebrew ; confusion often occurring in that language from 
 the want of some means for determining which is the subject and which 
 the predicate. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 105 
 
 ho Oropi te whenua taonga, Europe is the land of 
 property. 
 
 N.B. There are some exceptions to this rule, especially 
 when tenei, &c, are employed. ( Vide etiam, rule 5.) 
 
 10. Ko is always prefixed to every title or name of 
 men or things which, stands alone, without the verb ; 
 e.g. 
 
 " Ko te karere o Nui Tireni," the (newspaper) 
 
 the Karare o Nui Tireni. 
 Ko Hone, here is John, or, John. 
 
 Note. Occasionally we meet with an exception to this rule, 
 in emphatic, elliptical and complementary clauses ; e.g. (in 
 taunting) tou ngene, your ngene ;* taku tirohanga, my looking, 
 i.e., when I looked ; ka whati tera, te pa, that was discomforted, 
 the pa. [Vide our illustrations of JSpanorthosis in Preliminary 
 Remarks, page 102.) 
 
 11. It is sometimes used in elliptical sentences like 
 the following : E pai ana ano ; ko te maeke ra, we are 
 willing ; hut the cold i.e. we should be glad to go only 
 for the cold; Haere ana ia, ho tona ko taki, he went by 
 himself alone. 
 
 Note. It may be seen in the above example that ko is some- 
 times used for but ; so also is the following: Me he mea ko te 
 Paid, e rongo ratou, ko tenei e kore e rongo, if it had been Paki 
 they would have listened, but as for this they will not listen. 
 
 12. In connection with the two preceding rules, we 
 may observe that ko is almost always prefixed to the 
 nominative absolute ; e.g. ho taua hupu au, e kore e 
 rangona, as for that word of yours, it will not be listened 
 to. 
 
 Ko te hunga whahapono, ka ora ratou, believers, they 
 will be saved. 
 
 N.B. In some districts the ko is omitted under this rule. 
 
 * Ngene is a scrofulous tumour. 
 
106 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 14. The omission of the article. 
 
 There are some cases in which no article is prefixed 
 to the noun (a) when the noun follows immediately 
 after the verb ; e.g. Whakamate tangata, murderous 
 (vide Compound Words, page 17). Haere po, go by 
 night. 
 
 (b) Nouns preceded by the adverbial particles a and 
 tua ; e.g. tatau a tangata, count man by man. 
 
 (c) When a possessive pronoun is associated with 
 the noun ; ho mai toku kakahu, give me my garment. 
 
 Note. It is however, highly probable that the singular 
 possessive pronouns are, like tenei, page 30, compounded of 
 the article te and the plural form ofcu, &c; e.g. kei tenei taha 
 oku, on this side of me. If it had not been for nei> the speaker 
 would have said toku taha. The nei, however, attracts the te, 
 and thus resolves toku into its component parts. 
 
 15. He differs in its uses from te tahi and e tahi. 
 
 (a) He, of itself, often implies the verb substantive. 
 ( Vide rule 3.) 
 
 (b) He is very seldom found after a preposition. It 
 is almost always found in the nominative case after 
 the substantive verb ; e.g. he tangata tenei ; he kino 
 kau koutou. 
 
 Thus it would not be correct to say, I kainga e he kuri, it 
 was eaten by a dog ; hei tiki i he rakau, to fetch a stick. It 
 should be e te kuri, i te tahi rakau. 
 
 Note. When we come to consider the verbs, it will, we 
 think, be seen that in such sentences as Iiomai he wai, patuamai 
 he poaka, the noun is still in the nominative. 
 
 16. A. A strange use of a is sometimes met with in 
 Waikato. When two nouns follow each other in 
 apposition, a is sometimes prefixed to the latter ; e.g. 
 Ka noho atu tera i te kai mana a te kahawai, he 
 indeed ivill remain away from the food for him! the 
 kahawai ! 
 
 E hoe ana ki Akarana, ki te kai mana a te paraoa, 
 he is 'paddling to Auckland for food for himself flour. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 107 
 
 Sometimes it occurs in sentences like the following : 
 Na wai tenei haere a te po ? Whose going is this (I 
 mean) in the night ? i.e., who ever goes by night ? 
 
 (b) A personal pronoun following the verb in the 
 nominative will very seldom take a before it ; e.g. 
 Whakangaromia iho ratou. It would not be correct 
 to say a ratou. 
 
 To this rule there are a few exceptions ; e.g. tu ana ratou a 
 ia tangata a ia tangata, they stood each man. 
 
 {e) Proper names are not subject to the above rule ; 
 eg. it would not be correct to say, "Whakangaromia 
 iho Ngatipaoa. It should be a Ngatipaoa. 
 
 (d) When a question is asked in reference to a 
 preceding remark, a will precede the pronoun ; e.g. E 
 ki na koe A wai ? A koe ra, You assert who ? 
 You, forsooth. 
 
 17. The articles, definite and indefinite, are always 
 repeated in Maori, as in French, before every sub- 
 stantive in the sentence ; e.g. Ko te whakapono te 
 take o te aroha, raua ko te pai, faith is the root of love, 
 and good works. 
 
 18 Adjectives used substantively require the article ; 
 e.g. He tika rawa te he ki a ia, the wrong is perfectly 
 right in his opinion. 
 
 19. Frequently, also, the article is prefixed to what 
 would be a participle in English ; e.g. Kei te noho, he 
 is at the sitting, i.e. he is sitting ; ka tata te maoa, the 
 being cooked is near. 
 
 Note. It is, however, probable that all such words as noh", 
 &c, should, in constructions like the above, be regarded as 
 substantives. 
 
108 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 
 
 CHAPTEE XV. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 
 
 1. Nouns in Apposition. When one or more nouns 
 follow another in apposition, and are equally definite 
 in meaning, the same article that is prefixed to the 
 first will be prefixed to all the rest ; e.g. He tangata 
 kino koe, he tangata kohuru, you are a bad man, a 
 murderer; Ico au tenei, ho tou matua, this is I, your 
 father ; mau mai talcu pu, tera i roto i te whare, bring 
 here my gun, that in the house. 
 
 The following sentences are erroneous : Tenei ahau, ko to 
 koutou hoa, te mea nei, this is I, your friend, tvho says, &c. ; 
 Tiakina to tatou kainga, ko Waikato, take care of our settlement, 
 Waikato. The ko should have been omitted in the former sen- 
 tence : instead of the ko in the latter, we should have had a. 
 Proper names, and pronouns, will only take their proper 
 articles ; e.g. Nohea tenei Kingi a Parao ? whence was this King 
 Pharaoh ? 
 
 N.B. There are exceptions to these rules. Some of them 
 will be mentioned under the next head. 
 
 2. The preposition which is prefixed to the first 
 of two or more nouns in apposition will be prefixed to 
 all the rest ; e.g. Nahu tenei pukapuka, na tou hoa, na 
 Tarapipipi, this letter is mine (i e. was written by me), 
 your friend's, Tarapipipi'' s ; kei nga Pakeha ta matou 
 whakaaro, ta nga tangata Maori, with the Europeans 
 are the sentiments of us, of the New Zealanders. 
 
 The same usage holds in the vocative case : E hoa, 
 E Hone, Eriend John. 
 
 The following examples will show that this rule, which seems 
 as yet to have escaped the notice of foreigners, is worthy of 
 attention : A ka kite i a Hone te tamaiti a Hemi, and he saiv 
 
SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 109 
 
 John, the son of James. The meaning of this, as it stands, is : 
 the son of James saw John. Kei a koutou, nga tangata Maori, 
 in the opinion of you the New Zealanders. This literally means, 
 the New Zealanders are with you. In the first of these two sen- 
 tences it should be, i te tamaiti, &c. ; in the second, kei nga 
 tangata Maori. Again : kua kainga e koutou, te kura, it ivas 
 eaten by you, the school. The literal meaning of this is, the school 
 have been eaten by you. Kua kainga e koutou ho te kura, it has 
 been eaten by you, the school. As it stands, it means, it has been 
 eaten by you and the school. Again, if we were to say, " Na 
 Ihowa to tatou Atua, nana hoki tatou i whakaora," we should 
 imply that our God was made by Jehovah, and that it was he who 
 saved us. It should be, Na to tatou Atua. 
 
 There are, however, occasional exceptions to this rule, which 
 it will often be useful to remember : (a) when brevity of diction 
 is desired, both preposition and article will be sometimes omitted 
 before the second substantive ; e.g. i rokohanga atu e ahau ki 
 Manyere, kainga o te Tawa, (he) was overtaken by me at Mangere, 
 (the) settlement of Tawa ; i rongo ahau ki a Koiunuunu, hungawai 
 o Panaia, I heard it from Koiunuunu (the) father-in-law of Panaia; 
 na te Riutoto, whaea o Paratene, it belongs to Riutoto (the) mother 
 of Broughton. When a pause, also, is made between the two 
 substantives, the preposition will be sometimes omitted before the 
 second ; e.g. kei te kainga o te Wherowhero, te rangatira o 
 Waikato, at the settlement of Wherowhero, the Chief of Waikato. E 
 pa, kua kite ahau i a koe to mamingatanga hoki ki a au ? 
 Friend, I have found you out your bamboozling of me, forsooth. 
 
 N.B. This distinction is very similar to that which obtains 
 in English for the regulating of the sign of the possessive case. 
 In such sentences, for example, as the following : "for David, 
 my servant's sake," we should always have the sign of the 
 possessive annexed to the latter noun, because it follows the 
 preceding one in close and unbroken succession. In the follow- 
 ing, however, ' ' This is Paul' s advice, the Christian hero, and 
 great Apostle of the G-entiles," the sign of the possessive is 
 omitted, because the connection between Paul and hero is not so 
 immediate as in the preceding example. So, also, in Maori ; 
 when the latter noun follows in a complementary clause, as 
 descriptive or explanatory of the former, and has thus a pause, 
 or fc comma, intervening, it may occasionally dispense with the 
 preposition by which the former noun is preceded. 
 
 3. And we may here state, that clauses in 
 epanorthosis will frequently reject those rules of 
 government which they, under other circumstances, 
 
110 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 
 
 would have recognized ; and that they will often 
 rather partake of the nature of an exclamation {vide 
 chapter 14, 10, page 105, note). Thus in the 
 example just adduced, to mamingatanga is not in the 
 objective case, as is hoe in the clause preceding. It 
 would appear that after the speaker had said, Kua 
 hite ahau ia hoe, he recollected himself, and ex- 
 claimed, in explanation, to mamingatcmga holci. In a 
 leisurely constructed sentence he would most probably 
 have said, " Kua kite ahau i a hoe, i to" &c. Again, 
 in the first example of epanorthosis (page 102), Ka 
 tae te hohoro o ta tatou hai, te pau ! a native would 
 not say, o te pau as strict grammar requires, but 
 rather puts te pau in the form of an exclamation. 
 
 4. The answer to a question will always, in its 
 construction, correspond to the question ; e.g. Ba 
 wai i tango ? Na Hone, Who took it ? John. I a wai 
 taku pu ? /a Hone, With whom teas my gun ? with 
 John. 
 
 5. There is no form in Maori corresponding to 
 that contained in the following expressions : " Land 
 of Egypt," " Eiver Euphrates." To. translate these 
 by "Whenua o Ihipa," &c, would be to represent 
 Egypt, and Euphrates, as individuals possessing that 
 land, and that river. To render them by apposition 
 would, we fear, not much improve our Maori diction ; 
 though it would certainly be more in accordance 
 with Maori analogy. Here, therefore, necessity must 
 make a law for herself, and recognize the former 
 mode of construction as legitimate. At the same 
 time, it is desirable that it should be adopted as seldom 
 as possible. Thus, in the following: " Mount Horeb," 
 "Mount Sinai," &c, we should approve of " Mount" 
 being rendered as a proper name, to which it closely 
 approximates in English, and for which we think we 
 may claim the permission of the original. We there- 
 fore approve of those phrases being rendered: 
 
SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. Ill 
 
 "Maunga Horepa," " Maunga Oriwa," &e. Lastly: 
 Such forms as " the book of Genesis," &c, should 
 never, we think, be rendered by te pukapuka o Kenehi, 
 &c; for a native will thereby be led to believe that 
 Genesis wrote the book. The difficulty, however, may 
 be here easily obviated, for book may be altogether 
 omitted, and u ko Kenehi " simply employed a form, 
 by the way, which is adopted by the Septuagint. 
 
 6. The Possessive Case. This case is much used in 
 Maori. It is employed often to denote intensity ; e.g. 
 Ko to Ngatimaniapoto tangata nui ha ia ! Oh } he is 
 Ngatimaniapoto 1 s great man ; i.e. he is a very great man 
 in that tribe. 
 
 It will also, in some instances, supersede the nomina- 
 tive or objective of the person ; e.g. the following 
 sentence is erroneous : kihai ahau i pai kia whakaka- 
 horetia ia, 1 was not ivilling to refuse him ; this, as it 
 stands, means to despise or make a cipher of. It should 
 have been, kia whakakahoretia tana ; negative his 
 {request sub.) 
 
 7. It is sometimes useful for denoting the time 
 from which an action has commenced ; e.g. kahore i 
 kai, o to matou unga mai ano, we have not eaten since 
 we landed. Moe rawa atu ki Waitoke. Te haerenga 
 atu o hea ? We slept at Waitoke. From ivhat place did 
 you start ? Te taenga mai o Hone, kihai i rongo. Te 
 tononga iho o te ata, when John came here we would not 
 listen to him ; (though) he continued to ask from the 
 break of day. 
 
 8. Often the possessive preposition is used where, 
 in English, a different one would be employed ; e.g. no 
 Otahuhu tenei ara, this path {leads) to Otahuhu ; kahore 
 he wai o roto, there is no water in it. Ka kainga e te 
 matua tane te roi o te tuatanga* ki te kainga tapu. 
 
 * The tua was the religious ceremony performed by the father, or the 
 Ariki of the tribe, when the child was born, to remove the tapu from the 
 mother and the settlement. 
 
112 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 
 
 Apopo ake ka kainga e te Ariki te roi o tana tamaiti, 
 The fern root oe the tuatanga is eaten by the father. 
 Next day the fern oe his child is eaten by the Ariki 
 (head chief), 
 
 9. A word in the possessive case occurring with 
 another twice repeated will generally follow after the 
 first of such words ; e.g. ki te tahi taha ona, ki te tahi 
 taha, at either side of him ; lit. at one side of htm, at one 
 side. Sometimes other words will be found to inter- 
 vene between the possessive case and the word that 
 governs it; eg. ko nga tangata hatoa tenei o Waimate, 
 here are all the men of Waimate. 
 
 10. The word by which a possessive case is 
 governed is often not expressed in Maori ; e.g. ka 
 tokowha o matou ka mate, four of us have died; e wha 
 nga rau o te kupenga a Hone, there were four hundred 
 (fishes sub.) of the net of John ; kei hea to Hone? 
 where is Johrfs ? {garment sub.) 
 
 11. In the northern part of this island, when a 
 noun is placed in immediate connection with such 
 pronouns as noku moku, &c, it will sometimes omit the 
 article before it; e.g. no ratou Atua a Ihowa, whose 
 God is the Lord ; ka meinga mona wahi, appoint him a 
 portion. 
 
 Note. This form is rare in Waikato. 
 
 12. When two substantives meet together, one of 
 which denotes the material of which the other consists, 
 or some quality belonging to it, the word denoting 
 the material, quality, &c, will simply follow the other 
 as part of a compound word ; e.g. he whare papa, a 
 board house ; ika moana, a sea fish ; he repo harakeke, a 
 flax swamp ; he oranga patting a, the survivors from a 
 slaughter.; he tangata kupu rau, a man of a hundred 
 words ; i.e. a deceitful person. 
 
 13. Not unfrequently, when some circumstance 
 or quality is attributed to a person, it will be simply 
 
SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 113 
 
 affirmed to be him ; e.g. He uaua kiore koe, you are a rat's 
 strength ; he taring a whiti rua {or tua) koe, you are an 
 erring ear ; i.e. one who does not hear correctly ; he kaone 
 tenei, this (heap of potatoes) /* a gown ; i e. to 
 purchase a gown ; he aha koe ? what are you ? (i.e. 
 what are you come for?) Ko tfwra ko ia, I am he; i.e. 
 he and I are of the same mind, &c. ; ko taku iwituaroa 
 tena, that is my backbone (a form for making a thing 
 sacred). 
 
 Note. This mode of predication seems to have been much in 
 use amongst the Hebrews {vide G-en. lxi. 26). The seven good 
 kine (are) seven years; and chap. lxvi. 34, "Every shepherd is 
 an abomination ;" "That rock was Christ;" "This is my 
 body ;" "Ye were once darkness," &c. 
 
 14. Another particular, also, in which Maori will 
 be found to resemble Hebrew is the frequent substitu- 
 tion of the substantive for the adjective. Thus, we 
 frequently hear he kakakore koe, you are weakness ; 
 he kino te rangi nei, the sky is badness, &c; neither 
 must the student imagine, as have some in the 
 interpretation of the Scriptures, that this mode of 
 construction is always emphatic. 
 
 15. The objective case almost always follows the 
 verb; e.g. ka ngau i a au, he will bite me; except 
 sometimes in sentences in which na, ma, &c. are 
 used; e.g. nana ahau i tiki ake, he fetched me; noku 
 ka mate, since I have been poorly. 
 
 Sometimes a noun which is plural in meaning will 
 take the form of the singular ; e.g. ko nga tamariki 
 a Kaihau hei tamaiti ki a te Katipa, the children of 
 Kaihau are a child to Katipa; i.e. stand in the relation 
 of children. Ko matou katoa tenei, we are all here. 
 
 16. Compound Words. A word in connection with 
 a compound word will often be governed by one of the 
 simples of which the latter consists ; e.g. Kai atawhai 
 i a koe ; one to take care of you koe here is governed by 
 
 9 
 
114 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 
 
 atawhai ; ki te whenua kai mail, to the land of food for 
 you mau here is influenced by kai. 
 
 17. A verb can always be changed into a personal 
 agent by prefixing kai ; e.g. tiaki is to guard ; kai tiaki 
 is a guard. 
 
 18. On the prefixing and omitting of the article te 
 to proper names. 
 
 To lay down any exact rules respecting this subject 
 is, we fear, impossible ; neither, indeed, is it very 
 necessary, as genuine Maori names are being fast 
 exchanged for those of foreigners. There are, how- 
 ever, a few particulars which deserve notice, (a) A 
 simple substantive, adopted as a proper name, may or 
 may not have te prefixed, chiefly as caprice regulates. 
 (b) If, however, the noun be in the plural number, te 
 is never prefixed ; e.g. Ngakainga. (c) A verb, and 
 words compounded of verbs, will generally omit it ; e.g. 
 Tangi. (d) Numerals, as far as ten, will generally 
 take it. (e) The proper names which omit te will be 
 found, perhaps, to be nearly double in number those 
 which take it. 
 
 Note. The prefixes rangi and ngati belong chiefly, the 
 former to the names of females, the latter to the names of tribes. 
 
 On the distinction between o and a. 
 
 19. This very useful feature of Maori does not 
 seem to be clearly recognized in some parts of New 
 Zealand. It obtains, however, in the other islands of 
 these seas, and may be satisfactorily shown even now 
 to exist in those parts of this island in which it would 
 be least expected ; for example, all will admit that 
 naku i patu, mine was the having struck; i.e. I struck 
 (him) is different from noku i patu, because I struck 
 him ; and that ma te aha ? will signify by what means ? 
 and mo te aha ? for what reason ? 
 
 The words in which this distinction obtains are mo 
 and ma, no and na, o and a, and their compounds, 
 
SYNTAX OF THE NOTJN. 115 
 
 mono, and mana, nona and nana, toku and taku: the 
 first and leading distinction between these two forms 
 is (a) that o implies a passive meaning, a an active. 
 Thus, he patu moku is a striking for me, i.e. for me to 
 suffer ; he patu maku is an instrument for me to strike 
 with; (b) also implies the inherency and propriety of a 
 quality or thing, as well as the time and moral cause 
 of an action. 
 
 Hence it will almost always be prefixed to the 
 members of the body, to land enjoyed by inheritance, 
 to sickness, the productions of nature such as fruits, 
 &c. &c. Thus, we seldom hear, aku ringaringa, naku 
 tena oneone, he mate naku ; o is almost always em- 
 ployed. Again, we always hear, noku i haere mai nei, 
 since I came here; mou i tutu, because you were dis- 
 obedient ; nona te he, his was the error. 
 
 (c) is always employed in talking of garments and 
 houses, which are in wear, use, &c. Thus, naku tena 
 whare means, I built that house; noku, &c, I dwell in 
 it. 
 
 20. -^4 (long) is prefixed to the agent, and implies 
 that the noun which is connected with that agent is 
 either an act of it, or an instrument with which, or 
 sometimes a thing upon which, the action is performed, 
 such as tools, cultivations, food, words, &c. (as kupu, 
 korero, because they are fashioned by the tongue) ; e.g. 
 taku toki ; naku tena mara, maku te kupu ki mua ; kai 
 mau. 
 
 21. When the action is intransitive, o is generally 
 employed ; e g. te toronga atu o te ringa o Hone ; toku 
 haerenga. To this rule, however, there are many 
 exceptions. 
 
 Note. Visitors, slaves or servants, children (i.e. own 
 children, or children of whom the individual has the manage- 
 ment), husband (tane), wife (wahine) will take the a; when, 
 however, hoa, ariki, rangatira y matua, whanaunga, are used, o 
 will be prefixed. Reo also will take o (the voice being a part of 
 the man). Oranga also, though it applies to food, will take o 
 
116 SYNTAX OF THE NOTJN. 
 
 after it ; e.g. kai hei oranga mo matou, food to support us. In 
 the following passage, " nona te whiunga i mau ai to tatou 
 rongo," the chastisement of our peace was upon Him, the o in the 
 nona has, we think, supplied a more concise and clear rendering 
 than could have been attained without it. If it had been, 
 " N#na te whiunga, &c." we should have understood that it was 
 He who inflicted, instead of suffered the chastisement. It should 
 be remembered that there are two pronunciations of taku and 
 tana, viz. taku and taku, tana and tana ; the short a corresponds 
 to the o, the long a to the a of ma and na. Of tou, yours, there 
 are also two pronunciations, viz., tou and to ; the former corres- 
 ponds to the o of mona, the latter sometimes to the a of mana. 
 
 Note. The to is very frequently used instead of the tou 
 chiefly in those parts of the sentence in which euphony requires 
 that the sound should not be prolonged. 
 
 The importance of attending to these distinctions 
 between the o and the a may be shown by a few 
 examples. He hangi mau is an oven with which you 
 may cook food; he hangi mou is an oven in which you are 
 to be cooked, and would be a most offensive curse ; he 
 taua maku is a party with which I may attack another ; 
 he taua moku is a party come to attack me ; te ngutu o 
 Hone is John's lip ; te ngutu a Hone is his word, or 
 report, &c. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVES. 117 
 
 CHAPTER XVI. 
 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 1. Adjectives generally follow substantives ; e.g. 
 he tangata kohuru, a murderer. Sometimes, however, 
 they will take the form of an adverb, and precede ; 
 e.g. homai katoa mai nga mea, give {me) all the things. 
 Sometimes, also, they will take the form of a verb and 
 precede ; e.g. nui rawa taku riri, very great is my anger 
 or of a substantive ; e.g. he nui taku riri, idem. 
 
 2. The pronominal adjectives, tenei, &c. and taua 
 will always precede ; e.g. tena mea. 
 
 3. Adjectives will generally take the form of the 
 noun with which they are connected ; i.e. if the noun 
 be of the verbal form, so also will be the adjective ; 
 e.g. oranga tonutanga, eternal life ; rerenga pukutanga, 
 sailing hungry. 
 
 Note. To this rule there are many exceptions. Thus, we 
 have kainga kotahi, one eating ; i.e. one meal; matenga nui, 
 patunga tapu, whakamutunga pai, tikinga hangarau, korero- 
 tanga tuatahi. In many cases observation can alone determine 
 when such forms are admissible. As a general rule it would 
 perhaps be correct to say that when the verbal noun is of very 
 familiar use, so as almost to have its verbal character forgotten, 
 or when some thing or single act is spoken of, it will sometimes 
 admit after it an adjective of the simple form. It will, we 
 think, also be found that such common adjectives as nui, pai, 
 katoa, and also the numerals, most frequently follow in the 
 simple form. 
 
 4. Under other circumstances the adjective will 
 follow in the verbal form, especially when diversity, 
 or a number of acts of the same kind, is intended. 
 Thus, oku nohoanga katoa will mean all my settle- 
 
118 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 ments; aku nohoanga katoatanga, all the times in which 
 I sit down. The following expressions are objection- 
 able : Korerotanga whakamutw, tirohanga a,ta.whai f 
 whakinga pukw. 
 
 5. It should be noticed, perhaps, here, that we 
 sometimes find the verbal noun used as an adjective 
 or participle, and with a passive meaning : e.g. he toki 
 tua is an axe to fell with ; he toki tuakanga, an axe 
 which has been used in felling ; he mea whakakahuranga 
 mai no' tawahi, (clothes) worn abroad and sent here. 
 Whakakahu would in this construction be seldom 
 used. On the other hand, we meet with pu whakamoe, 
 gun taken to bed with you ; poaka whangai, fed pig. 
 
 6. Many Adjectives to one Substantive. It is 
 contrary to the genius of Maori to allow man} 7 adjec- 
 tives to follow one substantive. When, therefore, it 
 is desired to affirm many qualities of the same word, 
 the word itself will be repeated before each adjective ; 
 e.g. a great and good man would be thus rendered : 
 he tangata nui, he tangata pai ; or the adjectives will 
 be converted into substantives, by taking the article 
 he before them. Thus, the above sentence might be 
 rendered, he nut, he pai tena tangata, he was a great y 
 &c; a large red blanket might be thus rendered : he 
 paraikete nui, he mea whero. Sometimes the adjective 
 will be resolved into the verb ; * ' a great and terrible 
 God " would be thus rendered : he Atu nui, e wehi- 
 ngia ana. 
 
 7. The following are instances in which an 
 adjective is made to qualify two substantives : Ko te 
 poaka raua ko te paraoa, he reka kau, pork and flour 
 (they are both) sweety or a (siveetness) ; he mea reka te 
 poaka, he me reka te paraoa, idem. Tena koa etahi 
 hate, etahi tarau hoki, hei nga mea pai : show some 
 shirts and some trousers ; let them be good ones, i.e. show 
 some good shirts, &c. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVES. 119 
 
 8. Sometimes the adjective will unexpectedly 
 assume the form of a verb or substantive, eg. kei on a 
 kainga, e (or he) maha, he is at his many settlements. 
 The following form is heard at Taranaki : ki toru he 
 ra, it will take three days. Sometimes adverbs are 
 used as adjectives ; e.g. he tohunga rawa, a great 
 artist, fyc; te tino tangata, the very individual. The 
 following form, in which the verb supplies the place of 
 the adjective, is, we believe, in general use : a pouri 
 ana o matou ngakau mo tenei patunga o matou ha 
 rua ; our hearts are dark at this second murder of our 
 friends lit. this murder of our friends, it is tivo. 
 
 Comparison of Adjectives. The comparative degree 
 is denoted in various ways in Maori, (a) The first, 
 and most common, is similar to that adopted in 
 Hebrew, viz. by putting the preposition % (from) after 
 the adjective ; e.g. e kaha ana a Hone i a Pita, John 
 is stronger than Peter, (b) Sometimes there is joined 
 to the adjective some adverb of intensity; e.g. e kaha 
 rawa ana a Hone i a Pita, John is much stronger, Sfc. 
 (c) Sometimes it is denoted by the adjectives ngari 
 and rangi, the verb following in epanorthosis ; e.g. e 
 ngari a Hone i a Pita, e kaha ana. 
 
 (d) Sometimes the comparative is denoted by some 
 approbatory, and the positive by some disapprobatory 
 term ; e.g. e pai ana tenei paraikete, e kino ana tera, 
 this blanket is good, that is bad. (e) Sometimes the 
 positive is put into the negative form, and the com- 
 parative into the affirmative ; e.g. e ngari ano te patu 
 i a au ; aua e tangohia oratia taku. kainga, it is better 
 to kill me, do not take away my settlement ivhile I live ; 
 i.e. I should rather die than have my possessions 
 taken from me. E nui ana taku hara, e kore e taea 
 te muru, my sin is greater than that it can be pardoned ; 
 lit. my sin is great, it cannot be pardoned. He Mr a 
 te hunga i a koe nei ; e kore e ho atu e ahau nga 
 
120 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Miriani ki a ratou, the people that are with thee are 
 too many for me to give the Midianites into their power. 
 
 (/) Sometimes the positive is made antecedent, and 
 the comparative consequent ; e.g. me patu ano au ka 
 riro ai toku kainga, you must kill me, and then take 
 my possessions. 
 
 {g) Following are two modes of comparison which 
 are sometimes met with : poka he atu te pai o te ra 
 tahi % ou whare i nga ra ko tahi mano, one day in thy 
 courts is better than a thousand. Ma tenei e whaka- 
 koakoa ai a Ihowa, tera atu i te koakoatanga ki te 
 okiha, this shall please the Lord better than an ox. 
 
 Note. These two forms are not much used in Waikato. The 
 following is sometimes heard, but it is a weak mode of comparison 
 rere Ice ana te pai o tenei i tera, the goodness of this is different 
 from that. 
 
 (h) A very common process for denoting an 
 inferiority of degree is to associate two contrary 
 qualities : e.g. pai kino, indifferently good; roa poto, 
 (long short) of moderate length; mangu ma nei, (black 
 white) blackish. 
 
 (i) The adverb tua prefixed to the adjective denotes 
 a similar kind of comparison ; e.g. tua riri, somewhat 
 angry ; tua pouri, rather dark, (k) Sometimes com- 
 parison is implied by reduplication of one or more 
 syllables ; e.g. pouri uri y darkish (as in twilight). All 
 adjectives which, in English, are preceded by some 
 qualifying adverb as somewhat, not very, moderately, 
 as it were, &c. can be rendered into Maori by one or 
 other of these three last methods. 
 
 The Superlative Degree. Maori has no direct form 
 to mark the superlative, but expresses it by various 
 circumlocutions : (a) by the definite article prefixed, 
 with or without some word of intensity ; e.g. Ko au 
 te kaumatua, lam the eldest son; ko te tino nohinohi 
 rawa tena, that is the least; ko te nui tenei o nga 
 rakau katoa, this is the largest (lit. the large one of 
 
SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVES. 121 
 
 all the trees, (b) The form for the comparative some- 
 times necessarily implies the sense of the superlative : 
 e.g. he tino mohio ia i nga tangata katoa, he is the most 
 wise of all men. 
 
 (c) Following are two other forms for denoting the 
 superlative : e.g. e ngari a Hone e mohio ana ; a waiho 
 ano i a Wiremu te tino mohio, John is better, he under- 
 stands ; but leave the great knowledge with William ; or, 
 whakarerea rawatia i a Wiremu, &c. 
 
 Sometimes a great degree of intensity is denoted 
 by a repetition of the adjective, with a peculiarly 
 prolonged sound of the first syllable ; e.g. ntii, nui 
 whakaharahara. 
 
122 SYNTAX OF THE NUMERALS. 
 
 CHAPTEE XVII. 
 SYNTAX OF THE NUMERALS. 
 
 The Particles prefixed to Numbers. 
 
 1. Ko. This word will often, without te, precede 
 tahi; e.g. toku ko tahi, myself alone ; Ida ko tahi, be one ; 
 i.e. pull together. When tahi is used as a substantive, 
 it will generally take te ; e.g. ko te tahi tenei, this is 
 one (of them). 
 
 2. The numerals between one and a hundred will 
 seldom take any article ; but rau and mano will take 
 either te or he ; e.g. he rau pea, it is perhaps a hundred ; 
 ko tahi, te rau, or te mano. Sometimes the numerals 
 lower than a hundred will take the article te, when 
 the substantive is not expressed but understood ; 
 e.g. e taea e te tehau te whakanehenehe ki te hokorima ? 
 can the ten contend with the fifty ? 
 
 3. The simple numeral is mostly used in count- 
 ing; e.g. tahi, rua, toru, one, two, three, &c. Often, 
 however, the verbal particle ka is used in the same 
 sense ; ka tahi, ka rua, &c, it is one, there are 
 two, &c. 
 
 4. Ka, prefixed to the numeral, generally denotes 
 the completion of a number ; e g. ka toru enei matenga 
 oku i a koe, this is the third time I have been ill-treated 
 by you, i.e. this makes up the third, &c. 
 
 5. K is a very frequent prefix of the numbers 
 between one and ten. It differs from ka in that it 
 does not so distinctly imply the completion of, or the 
 arriving at, a number, and that whereas ka will 
 generally answer to the question, u How many have 
 you counted, made," &c, e will be used in reply to 
 " How many are there ?" e.g. e hia ena kete? How 
 
SYNTAX OF THE NUMERALS. 123 
 
 many baskets are those ? It would not, however, be 
 generally correct to say, JE hia ena kete ka oti ? It 
 should be ka hia. Again, " Ahea koe hoki mai ai ? 
 Ka rua aku wiki." When will you return ? In two 
 weeks 9 time. It should be hia rua nga wiki. 
 
 Note This distinction, however, does not hold invariably. 
 
 6. Kia. For its uses, vide Verbal Particles, page 
 138. 
 
 7. Note. The particles * and hua are occasionally 
 found prefixed to the numerals. ( Vide those particles, 
 pages 135-147.) 
 
 8. The case and number following the numeral. 
 In most instances, up to one hundred, the numeral will 
 require no possessive case after it ; e.g. a, ho mai ana 
 e ratou, e ono nga kete, and they gave six baskets ; lit. 
 they were given by them, there were (or are) six 
 baskets. 
 
 9. Beyond one hundred, however, a possessive 
 case is very frequently employed ; e.g. ko tahi mano 
 o nga tau, one thousand years. 
 
 10. When the noun is in the oblique case, the 
 numeral will generally follow it ; e.g. hei tapiri mo 
 enei kete e wha as an addition to these four baskets. 
 When it is in the nominative, the numeral will most 
 frequently precede ; e.g. e ivha nga kete, there were 
 four baskets. 
 
 11. It will be noticed that tahi is sometimes post- 
 fixed to other numerals, and adjectives, without any 
 variation of meaning ; e g. e rima tahi, five ; turituri 
 tahi, what a noise [you are making). Tahi will sometimes 
 take a plural after it. Ko tahi ona hoa, one were his 
 companions ; i.e. he had one companion. 
 
 12. Sometimes, when it is desired emphatically 
 to denote all the individuals or items contained in a 
 certain number, the number will be repeated ; e.g. 
 
124 SYNTAX OF THE NUMERALS. 
 
 hokorima hokorima iho -fifty fifty down; i.e. the xohole 
 fifty were killed. E wha, wha mai ano, four four to 
 me; bring the whole four. In one instance (viz. 
 that of rua) we have the first syllable reduplicated to 
 denote both; e.g. e tika rurua ana ano, they are loth 
 right. 
 
 13. Sometimes, in Waikato, we meet with an 
 ironical use of numerals, corresponding to that in 
 English, "six of one and half a dozen of the other ;" 
 e.g. e whitu waru atu ! they are seven eight other / E 
 ngari a Hone, e pai ana e wha atu i a Pita ! he is 
 four besides Peter ; i.e. he is not better than Peter. 
 
 14. On the Ordinals. The student has seen (page 
 26) the three ways in which these may be formed. 
 
 15. There are, however, some distinctions between 
 tua and whaka, as prefixes, which deserve to be 
 noticed. (1) Tua is not frequently found prefixed, 
 to numerals beyond ten. (2) Occasionally, also, a 
 critical inquirer will, we think, detect a difference in 
 the meaning of the two particles. Tua seems to 
 denote the place that a thing, &c. occupies in a series 
 or gradation ; whalca, a fraction which, being added, 
 makes the integer. Thus, in announcing a text, we 
 might say, ' ' Kei te ono o nga upoko, kei te tuawha o 
 nga rarangi," it is in the sixth chapter and fourth 
 verse. We could not, however, say "Kei te tvhakawha 
 0," &c. Again, a native will say, " Ko te tudhiet 
 tenei o nga whakatupuranga ka tae iho ki a koe ? 
 Ko te tekau." What number of generations is this 
 that reaches down to you f Answer, the tenth. Here 
 the generations are represented as following in a 
 regular succession to the tenth. If the reply were 
 "Ko te whakatekau tenei,' ' we should understand 
 that it is one, which, added to the other nine, will 
 make it ten a mode of expression which is sometimes 
 substituted for the following: " ko te whakakapi 
 
SYNTAX OF THE NUMERALS. 125 
 
 tenei o te tekau," this is one which fills up the place of 
 the tenth. The word whakapu is often also used 
 either to denote a tally (or surplus one), or the one 
 which completes the number ; hei whakapu tenei mo 
 aku riwai, this is a tally for (or this completes the full 
 number of) my potatoes. 
 
 Note. In speaking of a tenth, or tithe, or property, we 
 should prefer whakatehaa to tuatekau, the former being & fractional 
 tenth, the latter an ordinal. 
 
126 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 1 . The personal pronouns follow the verb ; e.g. e 
 mea ana ahau. 
 
 2. They are often, also, omitted after it ; e.g. Ka 
 tukua atu te purahorua, ka tae ki te pa, korerotia atu, 
 Kia mohio i te taua e haere mai nei na ka te whai 
 e te pa. Na wai i haere, a : ka tae ki nga whakata- 
 koto ; ka pau te huaki, ka tangi te patu, ka whati 
 tera, te pa ; the messenger is sent (he) arrives at the 
 pa, (it) is told (them), be on (your) guard against the 
 hostile party (which) is approaching, so the pa then 
 pursued. On then (they) proceeded, till (they) came 
 to the ambush, the assault is made, the blow resounds, 
 that flies, the pa. Sometimes, in Waikato, they are 
 redundant ; e.g. kei te kai taro mana, he is eating 
 bread for himself. Examples, however, of this con- 
 struction are not varied or frequent. 
 
 In Waikato the personal and possessive pronouns 
 will frequently take the particle nge before them, but 
 without any variation of meaning. 
 
 3. It was observed (page 28) that there is no 
 word in Maori to denote the pronoun it. Occasionally, 
 however, that word will be designated by ia and its 
 branches ; e.g. waiho mana e rapu atu te tahi huarahi 
 mona, let it {the axe) search out a path for itself. This, 
 perhaps, should be explained by prosopopoeia. Some- 
 times, also, we hear the following : te paraoa raua 
 ko te poaka, flour and pork ; nga toki ki a ratou 
 whakatoki, nga kakahu ki a ratou whakakakahu, axes 
 by themselves, garments by themselves. 
 
 4. Often the singular and dual of the personal 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PliONOUNS. 127 
 
 pronouns will be employed to denote a whole tribe or 
 company ; e.g. naku tena, na te Urioteoro, that is mine, 
 the Urioteoro* s; i.e. the property of my tribe. Kei- 
 hea taua ? where are we two ? i.e. where is our party ? 
 ko ta maua ki tena, ta te tangata Maori, that is a 
 phrase of us (two) of the New Zealander, i.e. of the New 
 Zealanders. 
 
 Note. This form is also often used when the speaker wishes 
 to propound some remark which would appear harsh if too 
 personal ; e.g. he aha kei a maua ko Hone? what is with me and 
 John ? i.e. oh, never mind John ; of what importance is he? 
 
 5. A pronoun in the singular will often be made 
 to refer to a noun in the plural ; ko nga tangata tenei 
 nana nga tikaokao, this are persons , his are the fowls ; 
 nga tangata nona te kainga, the men his is the settle- 
 ment, i.e. whose is, &c, nga tangata nana i patu, the 
 men his was the having struck; i.e. who struck. 
 Tenei matou te noho atu nei, this is we, who am silting 
 towards you. 
 
 6. It is a very common thing in Maori to put 
 into the third person a pronoun which has reference 
 to either the first or second ; e.g. hei rama aha ? tana 
 koke noa atu nana tana rakau, a light, for what pur- 
 pose ? his stumbling away his is his own stick, i.e. 
 " "What do I want of light? I can stumble out my 
 way I am accustomed to that kind of work ;" ko te 
 rangi mahi kai tenei ma tona tinana, this is the day for 
 procuring food for his body ; i.e. for ourselves; kei tena 
 tangata pea, it rests perhaps with that individual ; i.e. with 
 you ; tona tangata kaha ko koe, you are his strong 
 man ; i.e. what a very strong man you are (ironically) ; 
 haere korua, e Hone, raua ko Henri, go you (two) 
 John, they two and James ; i.e. go you and James. 
 
 This last form is, perhaps, peculiar to the Waikato district. 
 7. When two or more individuals are connected 
 
128 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 in English by the conjunction and, they will very 
 frequently be denoted by the dual or plural of the 
 personal pronoun of the more worthy person. For 
 example ? he and I are denoted by maua ; you and 
 Jane , korua ko Heni ; John and James by Hone raua 
 ko Hemi ; John, James, and Luke by Hone, ratou ko 
 Hemi, ko Euka. 
 
 In this construction the latter noun will be in the nominative, 
 even though the preceding be in an oblique case ; e.g. te atawhai 
 o te Atua, raua ko tana tamaiti, ho Ihu Karaiti, the mercy of 
 God and His Son Jesus Christ. Here, though Atua is in the 
 possessive case, raua and tamaiti, and Ihu Karaiti are in the 
 nominative. 
 
 This strange, though in Maori very common, mode of con- 
 struction cannot, we believe, be explained in any other way 
 than by an epanorthosis. 
 
 8. The noun belonging to the pronoun is often 
 omitted, especially in talking of garments ; e.g. keihea 
 toku ? Where is mine ? i.e. my garment. Tikina 
 atu te tahi ki a koe, fetch some for you; i.e. fetch 
 some garment. Ko wai toku ? Who is mine ? i.e. 
 my helper. 
 
 9. The Relative Pronouns. Following are some of 
 the ways in which the defect of the relative pronoun 
 is supplied in Maori: (1) Te tangata nana nga 
 kakano, the man whose are the seeds; (2) te tangata 
 i nga kakano, idem; (3) te tangata i patu nei i a 
 Hone, the man (who) struck John ; or (4) te tangata 
 i patua ai, (by whom, on account of whom) he was 
 beaten ; (5) Keihea, he poraka hei to i te rakau ? 
 where is there a -block (tvith which) to drag the log f 
 (6) Keihea he haer enga ? where is there a place on 
 which they (the cows) may run ? (7) Ko tenei tahu 
 i mate nui at, this is mine desired, i.e. this is what I 
 wished for ; (8) Te poaka i patua e koe, the pig 
 (which) was hilled by you; (9) Kei reira te pakaru, 
 hei reira te paru, you must coat (with raupo) all 
 parts of the house that are brohen. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 129 
 
 It will be seen in the preceding examples that the 
 most common means by which the want of the relative 
 is supplied are by the preposition, as in example 2 ; 
 (2) by the particles net, &c, and ai, as in examples 
 3 and 4 ; (3) by the verbal noun, as in examples 5 
 and 6 ; (4) by the possessive case with ai, as in 
 example 7 ; (5) by the passive voice, as in example 
 8. Occasionally, also, the personal pronouns, as in 
 example 1, or the adverb reira, as in example 9, &c, 
 are used for the same purpose. 
 
 10. Demonstrative Pronouns. (1) These, like the 
 primitive pronouns of Hebrew, are often used for 
 the verb of existence ; (2) and the time will frequently 
 be denoted by the pronoun used; i.e. tenei will 
 mostly be used for the present tense ; tena, and most 
 frequently tera, for the future or past, and sometimes 
 for the imperative mood ; e.g. e haere ana tenei ahau, 
 this I am going ; i e. I am going ; tenei au, here I am ; 
 tera e mate, that will die ; i.e. he will die ; tena taku 
 pu maua mai, that my gun bring here ; i.e. bring my 
 gun. 
 
 The leading distinctions between tenei, tena, and 
 tera, and also the distinction between them and their 
 resolved forms te, nei, &c. have been mentioned 
 (page 30). Instances, however, are not rare, in which 
 those distinctions seem to be disregarded ; and others 
 will occur which it will require some experience and 
 ingenuity to classify ; e.g. I te po nei implies that it 
 has been already dark for some time ; i tenei po may 
 mean the night of this day. In the following : Kei 
 hea te awa nei f (where is the channel that we are seeking 
 for ?) it is clear tenei could not be employed. 
 
 (2) Sometimes only nei will be admitted into con- 
 nection with the first person (i.e. when the speaker 
 is denoted as the person looking at the object spoken 
 of), and na into connection with the second person. 
 Ha has for the most part a vague or general applica- 
 
 10 
 
130 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 tion.* Thus, a person ealliDg to a settlement will 
 say, Kahore h e tangata i te kainga nei ? Is there no 
 one at that settlement (at which I am looking) ? If 
 addressing another who belongs to, or has seen, the 
 settlement, he will say, I te kainga na (or ra) at the 
 settlement ivhich you see there, or to ivhich you belong, &c. 
 Again : Keihea nga kau ? where are the cows ? kei 
 kona ano, they are there near you. If he had said, kei 
 ko, we should have understood him to mean, " they 
 are off, away, in that direction ; " na kona mai, come 
 by that direct path, in which you are ; na ko mai, come 
 by that circuitous one away there, 
 
 (3) Nei, &c, in composition will frequently supply 
 the place of the relative ; e.g. te taua i muru nei i a 
 Hone. 
 
 (4) Sometimes they will imply a conjunction, or 
 will otherwise limit the sentence in which they occur, 
 by implying a connection with a previous sentence or 
 thing. Thus, kahore au i pai means I am not willing ; 
 kahore nei ahau i pai will mean the reason was because 
 I was not ivilling, or you know I tvas not, &c. &c. 
 Again : I a koutou e t atari ana will denote a mere 
 general remark, while you are waiting ; I a koutou e 
 tatari nei denotes tvhile you are thus continuing to wait ; 
 te wahine i whakarerea, the wo?nan who was divorced; 
 te wahine i whakarerea nei (or ra) the woman ivho was 
 divorced under these (or those) particular circumstances, 
 or on that particular occasion, &c. &c. 
 
 The Interrogative Pronouns. Wai and aha are often 
 used to add intensity ; ma wai e noho, e au ? that 
 I should remain is for whom? i.e. I won't remain. Ko 
 wai hoki ka kite i te hoenga o tenei taua, maua 
 nei? who saw the departure of this hostile party, we 
 two ? i.e. we did not at all see this party's departure 
 
 For ra as an adverbial particle, vide page 90. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 131 
 
 to fight with you. Hei aha ma waif for what purpose 
 is it, for whom? i.e. what good at all is that for? 
 Kahore i rongo, kahore i aha, he did not attend, he did 
 not what ; i.e. he did not at all listen. Kahore aku 
 kupu, me he aha, me he aha, I did not utter a ivord, if a 
 what, if a what ; i.e. I did not at all speak. Ka hua 
 ahau he aha, I thought it was a tvhat ; i.e. I imagined it 
 was something very important you were going to talk 
 about. Sometimes a personal pronoun will be 
 associated with an interrogative ; e.g. ko wai hoki taua 
 ka kite atu ? ivho, we tivo t can see it ? i.e. who knows ? 
 
132 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 
 
 CHAPTER XIX. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 
 
 Of the Verbal Particles. The consideration of the 
 verbal particles, and of the other means by which a 
 verb is modified in Maori, has been reserved for the 
 Syntax, chiefly because the investigation of those 
 subjects will involve also that of compound proposi- 
 tions, and of other constructions which belong to this 
 part of grammar. 
 
 E (a) is sometimes used for the present ; e.g. e noho 
 mai, lie is sitting there close at hand, (b) Most frequently 
 it is joined with nei, &c; e.g. e riri nei, ivho is angry 
 with me, &c. (c) It is sometimes used to denote the 
 future ; e.g. ko wai ma e haere ? who will go ? He 
 tokomaha e mate, many will die. (d) It is chiefly 
 employed to denote contingency, or some future act on 
 which something else depends ; e.g. e riri ia, if he be 
 angry ; e tae mai a Hone tonoa ake, if John comes 
 here, send him after me ; e hau, if there be a wind. 
 
 There is a difference between e and ha as particles of the 
 future, ha being of much more extensive use ; i.e. being used 
 with all persons, and in all senses, whether absolute or con- 
 tingent (vide ha). 
 
 There are, however, some constructions in which e is always 
 preferred chiefly, we believe, when the verb is preceded by 
 some word with which it is in connection ; i.e. when it is pre- 
 ceded by the negative adverb hore, and sometimes hahore ; e.g. 
 ka hore e pai, if he is not willing ; hahore e tangi, she did not at all 
 cry. By the preposition ma ; e.g. ma wai e hanga ? who is to 
 build it ? and by no (sometimes), nohea e wera ? whence, i.e. why 
 should it tahefire? By the pronouns tera and ehea ; e.g. tera e 
 mate, he will die, perhaps; ko ehea e patua? which are to be 
 
SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 133 
 
 killed ? By the noun or pronoun in the possessive case (some- 
 times) ; e.g. taku e pai ai, that which I like ; he aha tau e tohe? 
 what are you importuning about? By taihoa and taria ; e.g. 
 taihoa e haere wait going ; i.e. don't go for a while. 
 
 N.B. For the distinction between e and ka, when prefixed to 
 numerals, vide Numerals, chap, xvii., 5, page 122. 
 
 (e) For e, as prefixed to the imperative mood, vide 
 page 38 (b). It is generally omitted in that mood 
 when the verb is followed by atu, mai, alee, iho, &c. 
 
 Ana is a particle corresponding in many particulars 
 with ha. It is most frequently employed, however, 
 in the continuation of a narrative, and does not often, 
 except in abrupt and animated discourse, occupy a 
 place in the leading clause of the sentence. 
 
 The following examples illustrate this last remark : 
 Ki te kahore e homai, ina haere ana ahau, ka riro, 
 if it is not given, certainly going I will depart ; ko nga 
 tangata o Taranaki, aia ana e matou ki te maunga, 
 the men of Taranaki, driven were they by us to the 
 mountain. It will be seen that the verb preceding 
 the particle in the above clauses gives a larger measure 
 of emphasis than if another word had gone before it. 
 In such animated sentences as the above the speaker 
 will generally prefer ana to any other verbal particle. 
 But another leading use of ana is to denote a con- 
 tinuance of action. The following extract from a 
 translation of the first eight chapters of Genesis, made 
 some years since by the church missionaries, will 
 serve as an illustration of this, and our other remarks 
 on this particle. We may add that, though we 
 suggest a few trifling alterations in the part quoted, 
 yet, considering the time in which it was made, it is 
 very creditable to the Maori knowledge of the 
 translators. 
 
 Ch. i., v. 1. I te orokomeatanga i hanga e te Atua te rangi 
 me te whenua. 
 
 2. A kihai i whai ahua te whenua, i takoto kau ; a ngaro ana 
 i te pouri te mata o te hohonu. Haerere ana te Wairua o te 
 Atua ki runga ki te mata o nga wai. 
 
134 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 
 
 3. Mea ana te Atua, Kia marama ; a kua marama. 
 
 4. A kite ana te Atua i te marama, pai ana ; wehea ana e te 
 Atua te marama i te pouri. 
 
 5. A huaina ana e te Atua te marama, hei ao. 
 
 In the first verse ana can have no place ; it would 
 give an unpleasant jerk, as well as the appearance of 
 levity, to a commencement so methodical and dignified. 
 Our translators, therefore, with good taste, employed 
 * : I te timatanga i hanga, &c. In the second verse, 
 however, in the clause commencing a ngaro ana, &c, 
 it is very correctly used; because there is a close 
 connection between that clause and the one preceding. 
 In the third verse it is, we think, injudiciously used, 
 because a new subject is now commenced. We should, 
 therefore, have peferred na ka. mea te Atua. So also 
 in the commencement of the fourth verse, A kite ana 
 te Atua i te marama, pai ana. We should prefer A ka 
 kite, &c. Pai ana is, we think, objectionable. It is 
 too abrupt and unconnected, and makes the pai refer 
 to the atua rather than to marama. JE pai ana, per- 
 hapsj or he mea pai, would be preferable. E-ana is 
 strictly the sign of the present tense ; e.g. e kai ana } 
 he is eating. Sometimes, when it follows a past time, 
 its meaning will also be past ; as may be seen in our 
 remarks on ana {vide also our remarks on compound 
 sentences, page 37). 
 
 Ka is a particle of very extensive use. It is some- 
 times employed to denote the present tense ; e.g. ka 
 pai, it is good. It is the particle most frequently 
 used in historic presents. It is very frequently used 
 to denote future events, and is often employed in 
 hypothetic or contingent propositions ; e.g. ka mate 
 koe i a au, you will be killed by me ; ka haere ahau, 
 ka riri a Hone, ip I go, John will be angry. 
 
 Note. Ka, as a particle of the present, will often differ in 
 meaning from e, ana. For example, ka tere te waka may 
 signify the canoe will drift, or that it dbifts ; e tere ana, that it 
 is drifting. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 135 
 
 For the distinction between ka and e, vide e. 
 Occasionally ka is followed by te ; e.g. Ka te arai 
 taku ahi e koe. 
 
 /, a particle of the past time (vide kua, below). 
 
 (a) Sometimes, however, it is employed to denote 
 the present ; e.g. koia i riri ai, for that cause is he 
 angry ? na te aha koe i tohe ai kia haere, why do 
 you persist in going? Ka tahi ano te hanganga i pai, 
 this house fivhich I am now roofing) is now for the first 
 time properly done. 
 
 (b) Sometimes i is employed where contingency 
 is designed ; e g. he aha koa i pono he titaha, he 
 titaha ; i pono he hate, he hate, well, it wonH signify ; 
 if an axe happens to be (my payment) let is so happen 
 (lit. let it be an axe). If a shirt, Sfc. 
 
 Ka whiua te tahi wahi ki tahaki, hei whakahere i 
 tona Atua, / whiua ranei ki te wahi tapu ranei ; i 
 whiua ranei ki te wahi noa ranei, he throivs a portion 
 to one side as an offering to his God. It may have been 
 thrown {i.e. it matters not whether it is thrown) upon 
 a sacred spot, or upon a spot not sacred. 
 
 Kua. the sign of the past tense ; e.g. kua korero atu 
 ahau ki a ai, I have spoken to him. 
 
 (a) The leading distinction between kua and i is, 
 we believe, that kua is unlimited (i.e. will not admit of 
 limitation) and i limited in construction ; and that 
 the former, when it precedes in the sentence, will be 
 often found to correspond to the perfect, the latter to 
 the imperfect of English; e.g. kua kitea te mea i 
 kimihia e koe ? has the thing been found that was 
 sought for by you? Kua ora koe ? Kahore, I ora ano 
 au ; a, hoki mai ana te mate ; have you recovered ? JYo, 
 I did recover, but the sickness has returned. 
 
 N.B. It would, however, be very incorrect to affirm, as have 
 some good Maori scholars, that kua always corresponds to the 
 perfect, and i to the imperfect. 
 
136 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 
 
 In accordance with the preceding remarks, it may 
 be observed (1) That hua is seldom nsed when the 
 verb is preceded by the cause, time, or other qualify- 
 ing circumstance of the action ; i.e. when the verb is 
 followed by ai. For example, we might say hua 
 patua, he was hilled ; but we could not say, te take 
 hua patua ai, the cause for ivhich he was killed ; neither 
 would it be correct to say, koia hua riri ai ia, for that 
 cause was he angry. (2) It will also, we believe, be 
 found that, in secondary clauses, in which the relative 
 is understood, i obtains a much more general use 
 than hua. For example : In the following sentence 
 " Enei mea hua korerotia e koutou," we should prefer 
 t korerotia. (3) Kua will seldom, when denoting 
 the perfect or imperfect tenses, be found associated 
 with the particle ho; e.g. we very seldom hear ho 
 Hone hua haere, it was John who went. In the follow- 
 ing sentence we disapprove of the use of both of 
 these particles E pai ana matou ki a ia, no te mea 
 ho ia hua atawhai mai ki a matou, ive love him, because 
 he ivas hind to us. We should have preferred mona i 
 atawhai, &c* (4) When a preposition immediately 
 precedes, hua will seldom be employed ; e.g. nonahea 
 
 * It is true that when kua represents the pluperfect, or the priority of 
 one action to another, it may be frequently found in connection with ko. 
 But this, we think, is a further confirmation of the distinction for which 
 we contend. For the expression "he had loved us," is clearly more definite 
 than "he loved us," the former implying that affection had been enter- 
 tained before some past act the latter simply affirming that it was enter- 
 tained, without reference to any date. Ko we defined as the article of 
 specification and emphasis, and it is quite natural that it should be asso- 
 ciated with a perfect to denote a pluperfect, its office, in such a construc- 
 tion, being to point out the individual who may be emphatically said to 
 have performed the act whose was the act which was antecedent, or past. 
 The sentence "ko ia kua atawhai" means, he is the person who wag first 
 kind. This emphatic use of the word ko has been already illustrated under 
 the head of Comparison, Adjectives : the sentence, " ko tenei te nui o nga 
 rakau," meaning, this is the large one of the trees ; i.e. this is the one of 
 which we may (emphatically) say, It is large. So, also, in the following : 
 "akuanei ko Hone kua tae," the meaning is, presently it will be John who 
 (emphatically) has got there ; i.e. John will have got there first. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 137 
 
 i mate ai, since what time, or at what time did he die ? 
 Nana ano i haere noa mai, he came of himself. 
 
 (5) Kua is never used after the negative adverbs 
 kahore, kihai, and kiano ; e.g. kahore ah.au i rongo, i" 
 have not heard ; kiano i mate noa, he has not yet died. 
 
 (6) The following, also, are constructions in which 
 kua will be found to give place to i : Me koutou hoki 
 i whakarere i to koutou kainga, as ye also left your 
 country ; me i kahore koe, if it had not been for you y &c. 
 
 In the following constructions, however, kua is 
 prefixed : Penei kua ora, in that case he ivould have 
 lived ; ano kua mate, as if he were dead ; me te mea 
 kua waruhia, as if it had been planed ; me i kahore koe 
 kua mate au, if it had not been for you, I should have 
 died. In the following, however, i is preferred: Me 
 i kahore koe i ora ai ahau, if it had not been for you, 
 (the cause) ivhy I was saved ; i.e. I should have been lost 
 but for you. 
 
 (b) Kua is sometimes employed where a present 
 would be used in English; e.g. kua mate, he is dead; 
 kua po, it is dark, or is past sunset ; kua riro, he is gone. 
 
 (c) In animated narrations of past events, kua is 
 sometimes employed to give variety ; e.g. te taenga atu 
 o Hone, kua mau ki te hamanu, e tatua ana, te tino 
 haerenga, so John goes, he has taken (his) cartouch box, 
 (he) is girding it on ; the instant marching. 
 
 (d) Sometimes, also, when the speaker wishes to 
 convey the idea of a certain and speedy accomplish- 
 ment, he will (as did the Hebrews) employ the past 
 tense ; e.g. E pa, he aha i kaiponuhia ai to waru ? kua 
 whakahokia mai apopo, Father, why do you withhold 
 your plane ? It will surely be returned to you to-morrow ; 
 
138 SYNTAX 0E THE VERB. 
 
 E hoa, reia atu : kua hoki mai koe, Friend, run and 
 {tell them) you will be back (in quite time enough) ; e 
 noho ana tenei ; kua pata iho te ua, e rere ana ki roto 
 ki te whare, we are sitting here, but immediately, as soon 
 as it rains, ive run into the house. 
 
 (e) Kua is often prefixed to denote an action which 
 is to take place, or has taken place previous to some- 
 thing else, in which latter use it will sometimes 
 correspond to the pluperfect of English ; e.g. I a 
 koe kua riro, after you had gone. Mo te ara rawa ake 
 kua maoa, that, exactly as he awakes, it may have been 
 cooked; i.e. it may be cooked against he awakes. Me i 
 noho kua wha na rakau e toia, if I had remained, four 
 logs would have been dragged. Akuanei mau nga riwai 
 kua kainga, presently, the potatoes that have been first 
 eaten ivill be yours ; i e. your crop will be the soonest 
 ripe. Huatu ko tena kua ngakia, no, but let that be 
 first dug. 
 
 Vide our remarks on ko, when associated with kua 
 (note to a, 3, page 135). 
 
 Note. The student will see, in the above examples, that 
 kua, when employed in this sense, will often enter into com- 
 binations which would not be admitted under other tenses. 
 
 KIA. This particle has been already considered, 
 as far as it is connected with the imperative mood 
 (vide page 38). There are, however, other uses of it, 
 which are both varied and important. 
 
 (a) It may, in asking a question, be used for the 
 future ; e.g. Kia haere ahau ? Ne ? Shall I go f 
 shall I? 
 
 (b) It may also be found where a hypothetic 
 statement is made, or an expectation, or other refer- 
 ence to some future event, is implied a use in which 
 it will sometimes be found to correspond to the 
 second future indicative and perfect potential of 
 
SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 139 
 
 English ; e.g. E noho ki konei ; kia hoki mai ra ano 
 ahau, stop here until 1 shall have returned ; Kia titiro 
 atu matou, ka patua to matou hoa, hei reira ka 
 whakatika atu matou, let us have seen {i.e. if we had 
 but seen) him strike our friend, we should then have 
 risen; me noho kia ora, ka haere you had letter 
 remain, and when you are well, depart ; e hoe katoa 
 ana ratou, kia oti te waka o Nini, they are all going 
 when Nmi's canoe is finished; I raro ahau e whaka- 
 rongo mai ana, kia mate, kia mate, a ka ora noa ano 
 1 was at the northward waiting for news from here of his 
 death, but he has recovered. 
 
 (c) Often, when intensity of negation, doubt, &c. is 
 intended, it will be used instead of the proper particles 
 of the present, past, and future : e.g. horo rawa kia 
 tika, by no means is it correct ; kahore kia kotahi, not 
 even one ; ko au kia mate, ko ia kia ora ? must I (by 
 Jeeding this pig) starve, while he has food? kahore ano 
 kia haere noa ! not yet gone ! 
 
 (2) It is often found, also, in exclamations of 
 wonder ; e.g. Kia nui ! Hoiv large ! 
 
 (3) In the same sense, also, it is used where an 
 infinitive would be employed in the learned languages; 
 particularly where contempt, disregard, &c, are denoted; 
 e.g. Kia whakarongo atu ahau ki o korero hei aha ? 
 why should I listen to your talk ? lit. that I should 
 listen to your talk is for what ? Kia ho atu taku poaka 
 mo tena ! that I should- give my pig for that ! i.e. I will 
 not give it. 
 
 (d) Kia is frequently employed to denote the infini- 
 tive ; e.g. haere kia kite, go to see. 
 
 (e) It will also be employed when the latter verb 
 is an amplification of the meaning of a preceding 
 one ; e.g. Ahea hanga ai tou whare, kia oti f When 
 will your house be built, that it may be finished f Te 
 tangata e whiuwhiu ana i ana tikaokao, kia wawe te 
 mate ! The man who is pelting his foivls that they 
 
140 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 
 
 may be soon dead ! Tanutanu rawa Ma ngaro bury, 
 bury deep, that it may be concealed (a song). Whiua, 
 kia mamae, beat it that it may be pained ; na koutou 
 i aki mai Jcia tat a, it was you who pressed forward so 
 as to be near. 
 
 Note. There is a distinction between hia and hi te, when 
 prefixed to a verb in the infinitive, which should be noticed. 
 Kia is, excepting in the aforesaid exceptional cases, seldom pre- 
 fixed to a verb in the active voice hi te almost always ; e.g. 
 Haere hi te to i te waka. We could not say hia to. 
 
 (2) Kia is almost always prefixed to the passive 
 verb, Jci te very seldom ; e.g. Tikina atu hia tirohia is 
 fetch it to be seen. Tikina atu Jci te titiro is fetch him to 
 look at it. The following sentence is erroneous : 
 Arahina ki te patu, led to be killed. It should be kia 
 patua, or e arahina ana e patua ana. 
 
 Sometimes, before neuter verbs, either kia or ki te 
 will be employed ; e.g. I mea ahau kia (or ki te), 
 haere. 
 
 Verbs following adjectives, by which ability, habit, 
 &c. are denoted, will take ki te ; e.g. uaua ki te mahi, 
 strong to work; e kino ki te tahae, is displeased at 
 thieving. 
 
 Between the uses of kia and ki te there may be 
 often a very material difference ; e.g. e riri ana ki te 
 atu noho means that he is angry at tJie stopping quiet, 
 i.e. that he wishes for war ; e riri ana kia ata noho, 
 means that he is repressing (them) that they may stop 
 quiet ; ka tohe ki a maua Jcia waru i te kai i te ra 
 tapu, they pressed us to scrape food on the Sunday. If it 
 had been, Ka tohe ki te waru, &c, the speaker would 
 have implied that tJiey (the persons toheing) persisted 
 in scraping, &c. 
 
 Some foreigners seem remarkably careless in the 
 use of this particle. We subjoin a few instances in 
 which it has been omitted, or introduced erroneously. 
 Ko tana hanga kia korero, his custom was to speak, &c. ; 
 
SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 141 
 
 it should be he korero. E kore ahau e ahei hia mea 
 atu; it should be ahei te mea atu. Ko te aroha e 
 whakahauhau ana i te tangata hei mahi ; it should be 
 hi te mahi. Whakatika hei patu ; it should be wha- 
 katika hi te patu, or whakatika atu, patua. 
 
 It may be here observed that (1) some verbs have a 
 partiality for certain particles ; e.g. hua noa ahau, or 
 ha hua ahau, / thought ; e kore e ahei te patu. (2) 
 Some verbs very rarely take any verbal particle into 
 connection with them. Of this sort are heoi, or heoti, 
 kati, taihoa, penei (in that case), and, sometimes, 
 rokohanga, or rokohina. 
 
 (3) Many constructions will be met with in which 
 the verbal particle is omitted, (a) A common adverb 
 of quantity or quality following the verb will often 
 cause the verbal particle to be dispensed with, (b) It 
 is also omitted in constructions like the following : 
 meahe haere ; whano mate ; kei te ata haere ai ; taihoa 
 maua haere atu ; while, on the other hand, we hear 
 taihoa e haere, &c. (e) In animated discourse, the 
 common verb will sometimes be used without any kind 
 of auxiliary, e.g. kaiponu noa ia, kaiponu noa, tangohia 
 e au withhold it, withhold it as he might, yet I tooh it 
 away. 
 
 AI. Some Maoris introduce this particle into 
 sentences in which others would omit it. Those 
 instances, however, may, we believe, be reduced to one 
 class, viz., to that in which ai is used in connection 
 with hia. 
 
 When hia is prefixed to a verb which is merely an 
 explanation, or some other enlargement of the meaning 
 of a preceding one, it will seldom take ai after it ; as 
 may be seen in our examples of hia (rules d and e). 
 But when the intention, cause, &c. are to be specifi- 
 cally denoted, then ai will be used. Thus, in the 
 following sentence : haere kia kite, go to see, hite is a 
 plainly natural effect of haere, and ai, therefore, is 
 
142 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 
 
 omitted. If, however, some unusual act is to be done 
 that he might see, then ai, most probably, would be 
 employed ; thus, e piki ki runga ki te rakau kia kite 
 ai koe, climb up the tree that you may see. The dis- 
 tinction is the same as that between the two following 
 in English: go and see; climb that you may see. 
 Again, in the last example of kia (rule e, 140), na 
 koutou i aki mai kia tata, ' ' nearness " is a natural effect 
 of ' ' pressing forward, " even though they had no specific 
 intention of being near; ai, therefore, is not used. If, 
 however, the speaker wished to say ye pressed forward 
 that I might be angry, he would employ ai : kia riri 
 ai ahau ; because here we have two acts, not neces- 
 sarily connected, and one specifically performed to 
 produce the other. 
 
 A wrong use of this particle may often seriously 
 misrepresent the meaning of the speaker. For example, 
 if we were to say, E inoi ana ahau kia murua ai oku 
 hara, we should mean, I pray that fin consideration 
 of my prayer) my sins may be forgiven. Prayer, 
 here, is made the immediate and effective means by 
 which this end is obtained. If a native were to say, 
 *'E inoi ana ahau kia homai ai tetahi paraikete," 
 absurd as would be the remark, it would mean that 
 the blanket is to be given to him, not as a favour, or 
 as due on other grounds, but simply as a reivard for 
 his asking. The Bible tells us of another considera- 
 tion, by which pardon is obtained, and prayer 
 answered ; and, therefore, in such passages as the 
 above, we must carefully abstain from ai. Koia nga 
 tamariki a Hono i haere tahi me ratou ; it should be 
 i haere tahi ai. E kore ia e poka ke i tana i mea. 
 It should be i mea ai; te tangata i he ai, the man 
 who had committed the offence. In Waikato this 
 will mean, the man through whom they had erred; it 
 should have been, te tangata nona te he. 
 
 (a) WhaJca.~-The leading property of this particle 
 
SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 143 
 
 is causative; e.g. tu is to stand, whakatu is to cause to 
 stand (vide etiani, page 48, uiider pai, kau, and kakahu, 
 and Syntax of Numbers, under Ordinals, 124.) 
 
 Note. In this use of it adjectives and neuter verbs will be 
 converted into active verbs ; e.g. toe, to be left ; whakatoe to put 
 by as a leaving ; e.g. wJiakatoea, etahi ma mea ma, put by some for 
 our friends. 
 
 In the following example the adjective is made improperly 
 to retain the form of a neuter verb : he mea whakapirau i te hau, 
 a thing blasted by the wind. Its meaning, as it stands, is, a 
 thing that destroys the wind. 
 
 Considerable variety may sometimes be found in the nature 
 of the causation implied by this prefix. Thus, puru, to cork (a 
 bottle, c.) Whakapurua nga pounamu, to stow, or pack {with 
 straw, $<?., between) them. Waha, to carry on the back; whaka- 
 waha, to take up the load on the back ; e.g. waiho atu e au e 
 whakawaha ana, as I came away they were loading themselves with 
 their burdens. 
 
 (b) Sometimes it will imply the becoming, or the 
 being like to, or the feigning, or exhibiting the root 
 to which it is prefixed. Frequently, also, it will 
 indicate an origin, or propriety in the root; e.g. Kei 
 te whakar iwai a Hone i roto i te rua, John is making 
 himself potatoes, i.e. (is occupying the place of) in the 
 rua (or potato house) ; ka po, ka whakaaki ; ka awatea 
 ka whakakeapua,, at night it became afire, by day it became 
 a cloud ; kia ^A^^tangata, to act like a man; ka riro, 
 ka whaka-llone ki te wai, he ivill be off, and become like 
 John in the water ; i.e. will be drowned as John was; 
 he kupu #/itftf-te-Kanaua, a speech made by Kanaua; 
 i.e. in his style; he tangata ivhaka-lSl ga-puhi, a person 
 belonging to, or that frequently visits Ngapuhi ; he aha 
 kei to tatou hoa ? Kahore pea. E whakamatemsite 
 noa iho ana, kia kiia e mate ana, What is the matter 
 with our friend? Nothing at all. Jleis feigning sickness, 
 that he may be regarded as univell. 
 
 (c) Sometimes it will denote reciprocity ; e.g. ko 
 
144 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 
 
 ratou whakar&tou hoki, he is one of themselves, (d) 
 Sometimes it will denote an action either inceptive 
 or gradually declining ; e.g. e whakaiutiiki ana te tai, 
 the tide is beginning to get full ; e w>A##hemohemo ana, 
 he is sinking ; i.e. is on the point of death, (e) Some- 
 times it will denote towards (vide page 69). (/) 
 Occasionally it will indicate some action corresponding 
 to the sense of the root ; e.g. ka whaka-ahiahi ratou, 
 they act at sunset ; i.e. they wait for sunset to make 
 their assault. 
 
 The other Auxiliaries of the Verb. These, it has 
 been already observed, are adverbs, prepositions, pro- 
 nouns, and the articles he and te, placed in connection 
 with the verb. We proceed to make a few remarks 
 upon them, and some other forms which the Maori 
 verb occasionally assumes. 
 
 On the Adverbs as Auxiliaries. These chiefly are the 
 adverbs of intensity and negation ; we may add, also, 
 the particles atu, mai, ake, iho. 
 
 The adverbs of intensity, as well as the last men- 
 tioned particles, will frequently lose their distinctive 
 force, and either in some way modify the meaning 
 i.e. denote rapidity and certainty of effect, succession 
 or connection of events, &c. or be redundant. The 
 following examples will, it is hoped, sufficiently illus- 
 trate their use : Te whakaarahanga ake o te ra, 
 tahuri tonu iho, the putting up of the sail forthwith 
 was it upset; akuanei, ahiahi noa, ka tata ta maua 
 te oti, presently by sunset ours will be near being 
 finished; mo te ara rawa ake o nga tamariki kua 
 maoa, that exactly as the children awake it may 
 have been cooked; i.e. it may be cooked before they awake ; 
 kahore, ha, he kainga ; kainga* rawa atu ki Waitoke, 
 oA, there is no settlement (in the interval) ; the nearest 
 
 * The student will see in this and the other examples that the noun, 
 as is very usual in Maori, assumes the form of a verb. To translate 
 literally such verbs into English is often impossible. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 145 
 
 settlement is Waitoke ; tia rawa ki te raukura, pani 
 raw a ki te kokowai, he braided his hair with feathers, 
 and besmeared himself with red ochre ; te tino haerenga, 
 so on they started. 
 
 N.B. Between noa ake and noa atu a distinction will some- 
 times be found, not unlike that which obtains between the 
 perfect and imperfect of English. Noa ake will generally 
 convey an allusion to some date, either present or past ; noa atu 
 will most frequently refer to the past, without any such allusion, 
 e.g. kua mate, noa ake, he has been dead this some time ; kua 
 mate noa atu, he died a long time ago ; kua maoa, noa ake te kai, 
 the food has been this long time cooked ; kua maoa noa at a, it was 
 cooked a long time ago ; kua mate noa ake i reira, he had been dead 
 then some time ; kua mate noa atu i reira, he had been dead a long 
 time previous to that date. 
 
 For further illustrations of the adverbs as auxilia- 
 ries the student is referred to chapter ix. For the 
 negative adverbs, as employed with the verb, vide 
 next chapter. 
 
 Of the Prepositions. The use of these as auxiliaries 
 is to supply the place of the verb substantive when no 
 verb is expressed in the sentence ; e.g. naltu tenei, this 
 is mine ; kei hea, where is it ? la au i runga, when I ivas 
 at the southward. The tenses they denote, and those 
 also which they admit after them, have been mentioned 
 (chapter viii). Other notices respecting them will be 
 found in the next chapter.* 
 
 * Following is a connected view of some of the principal means by 
 which the defect of the substantive verb is supplied or implied, in Maori : 
 He kuri tenei, this is a dog. Tenei a Hone, This is John. Tika rawa, it is 
 very correct. Ki te ivhai han i te po nei, if there be wind in the night, die. 
 Ki te wa hau, &c, idem. Ka ai an hei kianga mai man, I am for an 
 ordering for yon, i.e. you find in me one that will obey, &c. Waiho, and 
 sometimes meinga, are often used instead of ai. E ai ki tana, it is ac- 
 cording to his, i.e., as he affirms. 
 
 The following forms are worthy of notice : Rokohanga rawatanga atu 
 e ahau ko Raiana ! on my reaching (that place) there was Lion ! roko- 
 hanga atu, ko te tahi tangata o Taupo i Maungatautari e noho ana, when I 
 got (there) there teas a man of, &c. Taku hoenga ki roto, ko te waka o 
 Hone, as I was paddling tip the river, lo ! there was the canoe of John, &c. 
 Some, we observe, use tera taua for this form. We have never heard it in 
 Waikato ; hei te pera me tou, let it be like yours. Kaua hei pera, Don't 
 .say so. 
 
 11 
 
146 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 
 
 Verbs which assume the form of a noun. It has been 
 already observed that Maori inclines to the substantive 
 form. That such is only natural will be obvious to 
 anyone who will reflect that it is more easy for an 
 unpolished mind to conceive of things as existences, 
 than to trace them through the various modifications 
 of act denoted in a verb. In many instances, indeed, 
 a New Zealander is compelled to adopt this form, in 
 consequence of the Maori verb not supplying any 
 satisfactory form for the infinitive mood and the 
 participles. That these two parts of speech strongly 
 partake of the nature of a noun is well known ; and 
 we may, therefore, be prepared to find the forms for 
 denoting them in Maori exhibit a mixed character 
 i.e. to be a kind of compound of the verb and the 
 noun. It may be added, also, that, as in some Latin 
 authors, the infinitive mood is often used for the finite 
 verb,* so also, in Maori, will the verbal noun, especially 
 when a brief and animated mode of diction is desired, 
 be found very frequently to occupy the place of the 
 verb. 
 
 The following examples illustrate the various 
 modes in which the Maori verb adopts the substan- 
 tive form. 
 
 The student will observe that even passive verbs 
 will submit to the same operation, and receive the 
 sign of the substantive (viz. the article) before them ; 
 e.g. Tenei au te tu atu nei, here am I the standing 
 towards (you); he kainga hou te rapua nei, a new 
 country is the being sought, i.e. is what we are seeking 
 for ; ko koe te korerotia nei, it is you who are the being 
 talked about ; he noho aha tau ? what are you sitting 
 for ? kua oti te keri, it is finished, the being dug ; ka 
 
 * It will also be recollected that the gerunds and participles will, in 
 that language, often subserve the same office. Thus we have "ante 
 domandum," before they are tamed, "urit videndo," he bums when he looks ; 
 "cum Epicurus voluptate metiens summum bonum," whereas Epicurus, 
 who measures the chief good by pleasure. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 147 
 
 tata ahau te patua e koe, / am near the heing beaten by 
 you; he mohio koe; are you a knowing? i.e. do you 
 know anything about it ? 
 
 The following are examples of the verbal noun as 
 used for the finite verb : Me he mea ho te mahue- 
 tanga o to matou waka, if it had been the leaving of 
 our canoe, i.e. if our canoe had been left to us ; kei 
 riri mai ia ki te kai; te taunga iho ko ia, ko tana 
 waka, lest he (the God) be angry at the food {not having 
 been given) the alighting (upon him, the priest), Sfc. i.e. 
 and should then light upon him, &c. ; haere atu ana a 
 Eona ki te kawe wai, Ka pouri. Te kanganga ki te 
 marama. Te tino tikinga iho nei, ka tae ki a Eona, 
 Rona (the man in the moon) goes to fetch water. It is 
 dark. The cursing at the moon. The instant coming 
 down to him, Sfc, i.e. he cursed at the moon, and she, 
 in anger, came down to him. 
 
 Note. More examples of this very animated mode of nar- 
 ration might be easily adduced. The student will find several 
 others scattered throughout this work. "We may observe, 
 also, that the very frequent use of this form by the natives 
 constitutes one remarkable feature by which the language, as 
 spoken by him, differs from that spoken by the foreigner. 
 
 As a further illustration of the way in which predi- 
 cation in Maori is sometimes performed by the sub- 
 stantive, the following forms may be mentioned : He 
 mea whakamaori no te reo pakeha, a thing translated 
 from the foreigner's tongue, i.e. it was translated from, 
 &c. Na Hone tenei, he mea ho atu na Pita this is 
 John's ; it was presented to him by Pita : lit. it was a 
 thing presented, &c. Akuanei, he noho atu te otinga, 
 presently a remaining away tvill be the end, i.e. (we shall 
 find that) he will remain away. 
 
 It should be also noted that the following verbs 
 always take the substantive form after them, viz. 
 hohoro, oti, hei and ahei, pau, taea, tau, timata, heoi, 
 
148 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 
 
 ano, kati, poto ; e.g. timata te mahi, commence to ivork; 
 kati te tahae, stop thieving, Sfc. 
 
 Note. These verbs, it would appear, deserve most justly 
 the appellation of " auxiliaries" 1st, as they are real verbs; 
 and, 2nd, as by their help we can approximate to many forms 
 of the verb in other languages. For example, kua oti te tiki, 
 mai, has been fetched hence ; e kore e ahei te korero, cannot 
 divulge. 
 
 The use of the verbal noun, it would appear, is very 
 prevalent in Oriental languages (vide Lee, " Heb. 
 Gram.," second edition, pp. 75 and 76, and Carey's 
 "Gram, of the Burman ; " also Humboldt, " On the 
 Chinese," as there quoted). The following form, 
 however, will often be found in Maori to supersede 
 it. 
 
 A noun or pronoun in the oblique case will 
 frequently, in Maori, take the finite verb after it; # 
 e.g. e whakapono ana ahau ki a ia i mate i a Ponotio 
 Pirato. 
 
 The expression " ki tana hekenga atu ki te reinga " 
 is precisely the same as " ki a ia i heke atu ki," &c. 
 Again, Noku i haere mai nei, since I arrived here : 
 lit. from or of me (I mean) came here ; ko te rua tenei 
 o nga wika o Hone, i hohi ai, this is the second tveek 
 since John returned', lit. this is the second week of John 
 (I mean returned) i a ia e ngaro ana, whilst he is hid; 
 mo ratou kahore i rongo, because they would not obey : 
 lit. for them (I mean) their not having obeyed. 
 
 Often, also, a noun which in English would be in 
 the nominative will, in Maori, be converted into the 
 possessive, the verb following as in the preceding rule ; 
 
 * This is an exception to what we find in English and other languages, 
 the finite verb in them being very seldom found after an oblique case, i.e., 
 after any case besides the nominative, unless the relative, or the personal 
 pronoun, with some conjunction, intervene. We may observe, also, that 
 the verbal particles will be often prefixed to other words besides the verb ; 
 e.g., E kore koe e pai kia mau e hanga ? Are you not willing that you should 
 do it ? Kia mou ai te kianga, that the land should be yours. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 149 
 
 e.g. naku i patu, I struck : lit. it was mine (I mean) 
 the having struck it ; maku e korero, I will speak : lit. it 
 will be for me (I mean) the speaking. 
 
 It was most probably through ignorance of this and the pre- 
 ceding rule that some good Maori speakers have adopted the 
 following very unsatisfactory analysis of the two last examples : 
 u Naku i patu," they would translate, it ivas struck by me; 
 "maku e korero," it shall be spoken by me; and they thus 
 explain them: Na and ma mean by ; and patu and korero, 
 though active in form, are passive in meaning. To this theory, 
 however, there are strong objections. (1.) It cannot be shown, 
 except by examples derived from this class, that na and ma 
 ever signify by ; these words all must admit are the active form 
 of no and mo the prepositions which denote the possessive case. 
 (2.) It will altogether fail in those instances in which other 
 prepositions besides not and ma are found. In the following, 
 for example : " I a au e noho ana I reira," whilst I was sitting 
 there ; nona i tango, because he took it ; it will be seen that it is 
 as difficult to determine the nominatives of ' ' noho ' ' and 
 11 tango " as it was to determine those of patu and korero in the 
 other examples. Those who attend to the genius of the 
 language (vide Preliminary Remarks, pages 100 and 101, and 
 Syntax of Nouns, sec. 3, page 109) will, we think, find but 
 little difficulty in the question. They will see that there are 
 no participles, adverbs, or relative pronouns in Maori, and 
 that, therefore, we must not be surprised at a construction which, 
 though loose, is admirably adapted to supply the defect. 
 That Maori has a peculiar love for the possessive form in 
 predication, especially when a relative pronoun is understood, 
 may be seen in the following examples* : Ko Tiaki anake ta 
 matou i kite, Tiaki ivas the only person that we saw : lit. Tiaki 
 was our only one (actively) (I mean) saw ; ka tohe ki ana i pai 
 ai, he holds out for what he desired : lit. he holds out for his (I 
 mean) desired ; he mate toku, I am sick : lit., a sickness is mine ; 
 ka tika tau, you are right : lit. yours is right ; koe would not be 
 here used ; ko taku noho tenei, a, po noa, I will sit here till night : 
 lit. this is my sitting until night. 
 
 The leading meaning of na and ma, and their cor- 
 
 * That the English language hail once a similar tendency might, we 
 think, be shown by many examples. Thus we hear, "have pity on me," 
 " have her forth," "I have remembrance of thee in my prayer." Many of 
 our tenses, also, are formed by this auxiliary ; e.g. " I have seen," "he had 
 gone," " I would have loved," &c. The frequent use, also, of this form in 
 the Greek may be seen in Donnegan's Greek Lexicon, under "echo" to 
 hold. 
 
150 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 
 
 responding passives, no and mo, seems to be, of the one 
 class, present or past ; of the other, future possession. 
 And most of the examples given in pp. 60-65 of 
 their various uses might be reduced to those heads. 
 Thus, " no te mane i haere rnai ai " means, literally, 
 it was of the Monday (I mean) having come. "No reira 
 i riri," it was of that cause (I mean) the having been 
 angry; " Mo a, mua haere ai," let it be for a future 
 period (I mean) the going, &c. 
 
 Compound Tenses* A compound tense is one whose 
 time and quality are modified by some other time or 
 circumstance with which it is connected. 
 
 Thus in the examples in page 37 me i reira ahau e 
 pai ana, e ana, which, taken absolutely, is present, 
 now represents the pluperfect potential; because it 
 has a reference to i reira, a past time, and to me, a 
 particle denoting contingency. Again, in the ex- 
 ample, akuanei tae rawa atu, kua mate ; hua, taken 
 absolutely, refers to past time ; but here it is taken 
 relatively, and refers to a future, i.e. to the time in 
 
 * As the English language supplies but few illustrations of this mode 
 of construction, we will here lay before the student some extracts from 
 Professor Lee's Hebrew Grammar, as well to show how much this usage 
 obtains in Oriental languages as to enable him to enter more readily into 
 the subject. Professor L. says (page 328) : " Any writer commencing his 
 narrative will necessarily speak of past, present, or future events with 
 reference to the period in which his statement is made." This, he says, is 
 the " absolute use of the tense." Again, " A person may speak of those 
 events with reference to some other period or event already introduced 
 into the context." This is the relative use "Hence, a preterite connected 
 with another preterite will be equivalent to our pluperfect ; a present 
 following a preterite to our imperfect, and so on." Again (page 330) : 
 "They, the Arabians, consider the present tense as of two kinds; one 
 they term the real 'present, which is what our grammarians always under- 
 stand by the present tense. The other they term the present as to the 
 narration ; by which they mean the time contemporary with any event, 
 and which may, therefore, be considered as present with it, although past, 
 present, or future with regard to the real or absolute present tense." In 
 page 334 is a good illustration from the Persian : " Last night I go to the 
 house of a friend and there see a delightful assembly, and enjoy a most 
 pleasing spectacle." The student will see in the above example that go, 
 see, and enjoy are relative presents, being presents to last night, the time in 
 which the speaker, in his imagination, now places himself. This mode of 
 construction abounds in the Old and New Testament vide, for example, 
 Mark xiv., " He saiv Levi, and says to him" Says, here, is present to saw t 
 though past to the time of the narration 
 
SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 151 
 
 which I may arrive ; the sentence meaning, literally, 
 ''presently, exactly as I shall have arrived, he is 
 dead." The expression shall have been dead, in English, 
 all will see, is a compound tense of a similar character, 
 for it is compounded of a future and a past tense, 
 and thus represents a second future. 
 
 We proceed to lay before the student some ex- 
 amples of the most important combinations of time 
 and mood. To exhibit all that are possible would ex- 
 tend our work beyond its prescribed limits. Some re- 
 marks on this subject have been already made in 
 treating on the verbal particles. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. Ka taka ki hea, e haere mai ana? they 
 have reached what place as they come along f 
 
 Imperfect Tense. Rohahanga atu e au, r^ira e noho 
 ana, ivhen I arrived he was sitting there: lit., he is sit- 
 ting, &c. /mua e pai ana, formerly I liked (it) : lit. I 
 like, &c. i?pai ana i mua id. /pai ano i mua id. 
 JVa reira i kore ai ahau e pai, that ivas the cause why I 
 did not assent : lit. thence was I not, (I mean) am 
 pleased, /ki hoki ia, a hua oti ; i mea atu ia, a, tu 
 tome iho : he spake, and it was done ; he commanded, and 
 it stoood fast. Ileoi ahau me tenei tamaiti, ha haere 
 mai : I was the size of this child ivhen 1 came here. 
 
 I hea koe i mua ha kimi ? ivhere were you he fore that 
 you did not look for it ? 
 
 Nei hoki hua ora, haere ana ki Taranaki, but he 
 recovered, and went to Taranaki ; Kua mea atu ra 
 hoki ; e ki mai ana, -why 1 said so, he replies, i.e. replied. 
 
 Perfect Tense. Ka wha nga wiki e ngaro ana (or ha 
 ngaro nei), it has been lost these last four iveeks: lit. are 
 four iveehs it is lost. 
 
 /konei te kuri e kai ana, mei te huruhuru, a dog 
 
152 SYNTAX 0E THE VERB. 
 
 has been eating a fowl Jure, as ice may judge from the 
 feathers. JYoku lea mate, since I have been poorly. 
 
 Pluperfect Tense. Kihai i hinga ha waiho e korua, 
 it had not fallen when you left it : lit. it did not fall, you 
 leave it. I a koe kua riro, after you had gone. 
 
 First Future Tense. Ha Ngatiwhatua e takitaki to 
 maua mate, ka ea : Ngatiwhatua will avenge our 
 murder, (and) a satisfaction will be obtained. 
 
 Akuanei rangona rawatia mai, e lioko ana ano koe: 
 presently, 1 shall hear that you are still purchasing ; 
 lit. pi^esently, exactly as it has been heard, you 
 are, &c. 
 
 Kua mate ahau, e ora ana ano Bga rakau nei : these 
 trees will live longer than I ; lit. I died, these trees are 
 still alive. 
 
 POTENTIAL AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS. 
 
 Present and Imperfect. (For examples of these vide 
 on e, on ka, and on ai, also our remarks on ahei, taea, 
 &c. as auxiliaries (147). 
 
 Pluperfect. Kua riro au, na te mate o taku kotiro 
 i noho ai : I would have gone, but I remained in conse- 
 quence of the sickness of my daughter ; lit. I departed, 
 my daughter's sickness was the cause of my having 
 remained. F noho ana, na Hone i ngare : he would 
 have stopped, but John sent him ; lit. he is remaining, 
 John sent him. E murua a Hone, naku i ora ai : 
 John would have been plundered, but I saved him. Me 
 i kahore ahau kua mate : if it had not been for me, 
 he would have died. Jfua hemo ke ahau, me i kaua 
 ahau te whakapono : I should have fainted if I had not 
 believed. Penei kua ora : in that case he ivould have been 
 saved. Ka hua ahau, i haere ai, e rongo : I thought 
 that they ivould have listened (which) was the cause of {my) 
 
SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 153 
 
 having gone. Maku i runga e kore e naarere : when- 
 I am at the Southward (it) is never granted. Ma raua. 
 e rere, e kore e kohoro a Baiana : when they loth run r 
 Lion does not malce haste. Me i maku e keri, keihea ? 
 if it had not been for me to dig it, tvhere (should I have 
 been now) ? i.e. I should have dug to a vast distance.*" 
 
 The following combinations of times are incorrect : 
 / te mea i arahina nga Hurai, while the Jews were 
 being led ; it should be, e arahina ana. I kite hoki 
 ratou i a ia, a, i rere, for they saw him and fled ; it 
 should be, a, rere ana. To ratou taenga atu ki te pa, 
 i reira ano mahara ana ratou ki a ai, and when they 
 had reached the pa, they then recognized him ; it should 
 be, na ha mahara, &c. Ma Hone e whakaki o koutou 
 peke, per a hoki me o matou, John will fill your bags as 
 full as ours ; it should be, Ma penei me o matou. It 
 may be here noted that when two tenses are connected 
 together, not in the way of government, but are rather 
 in apposition with each other, the latter will generally 
 be the same as, or at least correspond to, the former ; 
 e.g. the following constructions are erroneous : 
 Korerotia atu, mea ana, speak, saying; it should be, 
 meatia. A ki atu ana a Hone, ka mea ; it should be, 
 mea ana. Ka tahi ahau i kite, noiv for the first time 
 have I seen ; it should be, ka kite. 
 
 Note. Sometimes, however, we meet with exceptions to 
 this rule: 1. "When there is a clear case for the operation of 
 epanorthosis. 2. When the particles a or na intervene. 
 
 The character of the sentence will sometimes be 
 found to affect the time of the verb ; as, for example, 
 in animated narration, where a large measure of 
 
 * The student is recommended to notice the various forms contained 
 in the preceding table, and to endeavour to add to them from his own 
 observation. It would also be most useful to throw into one form all the 
 various examples of simple and compound times that he will find in pages 
 40-42, as well also as those contained in the preceding part of this chapter. 
 
154 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 
 
 certainty, or when contingency is to be denoted, &c. ; 
 e.g. Kihai i u ki uta, kua tae ki te whare, kua totoro 
 ki te maripi, ki te paoka, E kai ana, he had not landed 
 before he had reached the house, had stretched out {his 
 hand) to the knife and fork, {he) is eating, i.e. immediately 
 as soon as he landed he began to eat ; E pa ma, kia 
 kaha. Kahore Kua u, My friends, be strong (in pulling 
 the oar), no, we have landed, i.e. we are close to shore. 
 A request or command, given to be conveyed to 
 another, will often be put into the imperative, just as 
 if the individual to whom the request, &c, is to be 
 delivered were really present ; e.g. Mea atu ki a Hone, 
 Taihoa e haere : say to John, Don H go for a while. Ekite 
 koe i a te Keha, Haere mai : if you see Keha, (say to 
 him) Come here. 
 
 Note. This form is generally adopted when the speaker 
 -wishes to be animated and abrupt. Sometimes, as in the first 
 example, it is the only form admissible. 
 
 Verbs associated to qualify each other. It should here 
 also be noted that when two verbs are associated 
 together, the latter of which is modified in meaning 
 by the former, in a way somewhat similar to that in 
 which the infinitive in Latin is modified by its govern- 
 ing verb, the two verbs will generally be in the same 
 tense and voice ; e.g. Kua haere, kua koroheke hoki, 
 he has begun to get old : lit. he is gone, he is old ; kei 
 anga koe, kei korero, donH you go and say, &c. ; e 
 aratakina ana, e patua ana: it is led to be killed. 
 
 Repetition of Verbs. The same verb will frequently 
 be repeated in Maori when contingency, intensity, 
 distribution, diversity, &c. are intended, and par- 
 ticularly when the speaker desires to be impressive 
 and emphatic ; e.g. Ko te mea i tupono i tupono : ko 
 te mea i kahore i kahore, (the karakia Maori) is all a 
 work of chance ; sometimes there is a successful hit, 
 sometimes a failure, lit. that which hit the mark hit 
 it, that which did not, did not; E pakaru ana, e 
 

 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 155 
 
 pakaru ana ki tana mahi, (it does not much signify) if 
 it breaks, it is broken in his service ; Okioki, okioki atu 
 ki a i a, trust, trust in him : i.e. place your whole 
 trust in, &c. ; Haere ka haere, kai ka kai : in all his 
 goings, in all his eatings, i.e. whenever he walks, or 
 eats, he retains the same practice; Heoi ano ra, heoi 
 ano : that is all about it, that is all about it. Hapai, 
 ana, hapai ana: raise both ends at the same time; i.e. 
 while you raise, I raise. 
 
 Note. A similar usage obtains in other parts of the 
 language ; e.g. ko wai, ko wai te haere ? who, who is to go ? 
 ko tera tera, that is another, or a different one ; he kanohi he 
 kanohi, face to jace ; ko Roka ano Roka, ko ahau ano ahau ? 
 Roka (my wife) and 1 are different persons ; lit. Roka is Roka, 
 and I am I. 
 
 Sometimes the former verb will assume the form of 
 the verbal noun ; e.g. te haerenga i haere ai, the going 
 with which he went, i.e. so on he proceeded ; na, ko te 
 tino riringa i riri ai, so he was very angry. 
 
 Note. The learned student need not be reminded of the 
 remarkable parallel which Maori finds to the four last rules iu 
 Hebrew. From this cause it will be sometimes found that an 
 ^exactly literal translation will be more idiomatic than another. 
 Thus, Gen. i. 7, "Dying, thou shalt die," could not be rendered 
 more idiomatically than if it be done literally: " Na, ko te 
 matenga e mate ai koe." 
 
 Of the Passive Verbs. It has been already observed 
 {pp. 47-48) that passive verbs are often used in 
 Maori in a somewhat more extended sense than is 
 met with in most languages. It may naturally, 
 therefore, be expected that their use should be more 
 frequent than that of active verbs ; and such we 
 believe to be the case, Maori seeming to incline 
 peculiarly to the passive mode or form of statement, 
 especially in the secondary clauses of a sentence. 
 Independently of other uses which they subserve 
 {such as often supplying a more animated style of 
 narration, being sometimes the more convenient as 
 being the more loose or general mode in which to 
 
156 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 
 
 advance a sentiment, &c), there are two of con- 
 siderable importance which may be here noticed : 
 1st. They are most frequently employed when the- 
 relative pronoun is understood, and are generally 
 equivalent to the active verb with ai or nei, Sfc. after 
 it ; e.g. nga mahi i whakahaua e ia, the works which 
 were ordered by him. The active form here, without 
 ai after it, would be seldom used. Vide also the 
 examples, pp. 47, 48. 2nd. They sometimes supply 
 the place of a preposition; eg. he aha te mea e 
 omah'a nei ? what is the matter about which it is beinp 
 run ? Te tangata i korerotia nei, the man about whom 
 we ivere talking. The following sentence, Ka korero 
 ah an. ki te whakapakoko, literally means, i" will talk 
 to the image ; it should have been, Ka korero& te 
 whakapakoko. This usage, however, does not extend 
 to all the prepositions ; and, when some of them 
 are understood, the verb will require ai after it. The 
 following sentence, for example, is erroneous : Te 
 tangata e kainga ana te poaka, the man ly whom the 
 pig is eaten; it should be, -&kai ana, or e kai nei, or e- 
 kainga ai. 
 
 Constructions will not unfrequently be found in 
 which the active form usurps the place of the passive, 
 and vice versa; eg. Ko tena kua hohoro te horoi, let 
 that be first washed. Kua tahu te kai o te kainga nei, 
 the food of the settlement has been kindled, i.e. the oven is 
 kindled for cooking. Kei te uta to mat on waka, our 
 canoe is loading. Ko tehea te patu ? ivhich is to be 
 killed f Ko tera kua panga noa ake, that has been much 
 longer on the fire: lit. has been thrown. Taria e kaivhaki 
 te poti, let not the boat be taken away (by yon) for a while. 
 He mea tiki, a thing fetched. Kua oti te keri, it is 
 finished, the being dug. Me wero e koe, it must be (or, let 
 it be) stabbed by you. Ka timata tena whenua, te tua, 
 that land has commenced (I mean) the being felled. 
 Kei reira, a Hone e tanu ana, there John (lies) buried. 
 Ka te arai taku ahi e koe, my fire is being stopped up> 
 
SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 157 
 
 by you, i.e. you are intercepting the communication, 
 &c. Kia rua nga waka e hoe mai e koe, let there he 
 two canoes that will he paddled here hy you. The follow- 
 ing form is not frequent : Kei te atawhaitia, it {the 
 pig) is being taken care of. Kei te takina te kai, the 
 food is heing taken off (the fire). When ambiguity 
 might arise from the object of the action being con- 
 sidered as the agent, the passive form is almost always 
 used : e.g. Ka poto nga tangata o reira te kitea, ivhen 
 all the men of that place have been seen. Ka tata tena 
 tangata te nehua, that man is near heing hurled. 
 
 Neuter Verbs which assume the passive form. Some 
 neuter verbs assume the passive form (1) without any 
 material alteration of meaning : e.g. Ka hokia he 
 huanga, if it is come backwards and forwards to you, it is 
 because I am a relation* (2.) Most frequently, how- 
 ever, they derive a transitive meaning from the 
 change. Thus, in the example already adduced, 
 page 48, horihori, to tell falsehoods ; te mea i horihoria 
 e koe he tangata, the thing which you erroneously said 
 was a man. Again Tangi, to cry; te tupapaku e 
 tangihia nei, the corpse ivhich is heing cried, i.e. which is 
 the subject of the crying. He tangata haurangi, 
 a mad person. Te tangata i haurangitia nei, a person 
 for whom another is bewildered. 
 
 * The passive verbs wheterongia, titahangia, &c, to which we allude, 
 page 38, note, may, we think, on reflection, be most correctly reduced to 
 this head 
 
158 SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITIONS, &C. 
 
 CHAPTER XX. 
 
 OF THE PREPOSITIONS, ADVERBS, AND 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 These have been considered at large in chapters 
 viii., ix., x., xi., and require now but little notice. 
 We proceed to consider the prepositions which follow 
 the verbs, and to offer a few other remarks respecting 
 them. 
 
 Verbal Postfixes. An active verb will (as was 
 observed, page 57) take i after it, to denote the object 
 of the action. Sometimes, however, hi will be found 
 to supply its place ; e.g. Mohio hi a ia, matau hi a ia, 
 wehi, hi a ia, whakaaro hi tena mea, karanga hi a ia, 
 kua mau hi te pu, seized his gun. Whiwhi hi te toki, 
 obtain an axe, &c. 
 
 Between these two prepositions, however, as verbal 
 postfixes, there is often a very important difference ; 
 e.g. Na ka whakatiki ahau i a ia hi te kai, so I 
 deprived him of food ; i.e. I withheld food from him. 
 Na te aha koe i kaiponu ai i to paraikete hi a au ? 
 Why did you withhold your blanket from me? He 
 pakeha hei whakawhiwhi i a matou hi te kakahu, an 
 European to make us possess clothes. Ki te hoko atu 
 I taku poaka hi te tahi paraikete moku, to sell my 
 pig for a blanket for myself Europeans generally 
 employ mo, but erroneously. Sometimes other pre- 
 positions will occupy the place of i. Ka haere ahau 
 ki te whangai i taku kete riwai ma taku poaka, 1 ivill 
 go feed my basket of potatoes for my pig ; i.e. I will 
 feed my pigs with my basket of potatoes. Hei patu 
 moku, to strike me with a form similar to hei patu ^ 
 a au. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITIONS, &C. 159 
 
 Note. Occasionally no sign of case will follow the active 
 verb (1) When the verb is preceded by such auxiliaries as taea, 
 pau, taihoa, &c. ; e.g. e kore e taea e ahau te hopu tena poaka, 
 it cannot be accomplished by me (I mean) the catching that pig ; or, 
 e kore e taea tena poaka e au, te hopu. (2) When the verb is 
 preceded by the particle me, or by the prepositions na and ma; 
 e.g. me hopu te poaka e koe, the pig must be caught by you ; ndkw. i 
 hopu tena, the having caught that (pig) ivas mine. To this rule 
 exceptions are sometimes heard. 
 
 Neuter Verbs will sometimes take an accusative case 
 of the noun proper to their own signification ; e.g. E 
 karakia ana i tana karakia, he is praying his prayers. E 
 kakahu ana i ona, he is garmenting his clothes ; i.e. is 
 putting them on. 
 
 Note. Considerable variation will be found in the preposi- 
 tions which follow such verbs as heoi, ka tahi, &c. ; e.g. Heoi 
 ano te koti pai nou, the only good coat is yours. Ka tahi ano te 
 koti pai, nou, idem. Manawa to tangata korero teka, he pakeha 
 (Taranaki), a European is the greatest person for telling falsehoods. 
 Ka tahi ano taku tangata kino, Jco koe (or hi a koe, or kei a koe). 
 Ka tahi ano tenei huarahi ka takahia ki a koe, you are the first 
 person who has trodden this path. If it had been e koe, the mean- 
 ing would have been, you now for the first time walk this road. 
 Often, also, the preposition will be omitted, and the noun put 
 into the nominative ; e.g. Noho rawa atu he whenua ke, settled 
 in a foreign land. Ka whakamoea atu he tangata ke, given in 
 marriage to another man. Te huihuinga mai o Mokau, o whea, 
 o whea, ko te Wherowhero, the mustering s of Mokau, &c, &c. 
 are to Wherowhero, i.e. Wherowhero is the grand object of 
 interest. 
 
 Between i and hi, when following neuter verbs or 
 adjectives, there is often a considerable difference ; 
 e.g. Mate ki, desirous of; mate i, killed by. Kaha i te 
 kino, stronger than sin, i.e. overcoming it; kaha hi 
 te kino, strong in sinning ; ngakau kore hi tana kupu, 
 disinclined to, &c. ; ngakau kore i, discouraged by. 
 
 Foreigners often err in the use of these and other 
 prepositions ; e.g I a ia ki reira, while he was there ; 
 it should be i reira. E aha ana ia ki reira ? What is 
 he doing there ? it should be i reira. Kati hi kona ; 
 
160 SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITIONS, &0. 
 
 it should be i kona. E mea ana ahau Ida kai i te 
 Onewhero, I am thinking of talcing a meal at Onewhero ; 
 it should be, hi te Onewhero. Hei a wai ranei te 
 pono ? hei a Maihi renei, hei a Pita ranei ? with whom 
 is the truth ? with Marsh or with Peter ? it should be, I 
 a wai, &c. He aha te tikanga o taua kupu nei kei a 
 Matiu? what is the meaning of that expression in Matthew? 
 it should be i a Matiu. Again Kahore e mea no te 
 kainga nei hei kai, there is nothing in this settlement for 
 food ; it should be o te kainga nei. Enei kupu no te 
 pukapuka, these words of the book; it should be te 
 pukapuka. Ko nga mea katoa no waho, all the things 
 outside; it should be waho. He kahore urupa o 
 Kawhia i kawea mai ai ki konei? Was there no grave 
 in Kawhia, that you brought him here ? it should be 
 JYo Kawhia. Again he mea tiki i toku whare, a 
 thing fetched from my house. The meaning of this, as it 
 stands, is " a thing to fetch my house ;" it should be 
 no toku whare, as in the following proverb : ' ' He 
 toka hapai mai no nga whenua." In constructions 
 like these the agent will take either e or na before it, 
 but most frequently the latter. In some tribes to 
 the southward of Waikato the following form is in 
 common use: He pakeke ou, yours are hardnesses, i.e. 
 you are a hard person. He makariri oku i te anu, I 
 have colds from the cold (air). The singular forms tou 
 and toku are mostly used in Waikato, or the preposi- 
 tion nou ; e.g. he pakeke nou } and makariri noku, or 
 
 TOKU. 
 
 Prepositions are sometimes used where a foreigner 
 would expect a verbal particle ; e.g. Kei te takoto a 
 Hone, John is lying down. I te mate ahau, I was poorly, 
 JS T o te tarai ahau i tena wahi, / have been hoeing that 
 place. This form belongs chiefly to Ngapuhi. Ka tae 
 te pakeke o te oneone nei ! kahore * te kohatu ! How 
 hard this soil is ! it is not at a stone, i.e. it is like a 
 stone. Kahore ahau i te kite, I donH see. This last 
 form is used chiefly in the districts southward of 
 Waikato. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITIONS, &C. 161 
 
 Adverbs. Most of the adverbs will (as was observed, 
 page 84) assume the form of the word with which they 
 are connected ; e.g. ]Rapw mar?V, raipua marie^Vr, 
 rapiu^tf msirietanga, &c. In some districts, however, 
 they will assume the form of the verbal noun, after 
 the passive voice ; e.g. Kapua m&vietanga. Instances 
 will also occasionally be found, in all parts of the 
 island, in which they undergo no change : e.g. Whiua 
 pena, throw it in that direction. Whiua penatia is, throw 
 it in that manner. 
 
 Negative Adverbs. Most of these will, when in con- 
 nection with the verb, take a verbal particle before 
 or after them ; e.g. Hore rawa Ida pai ; kahore i pai, 
 or (sometimes) kahore e pai ; kihai i* pai ; e kore 
 e pai ; aua e haere, kiano i haere noa, e hara i a au, 
 it is not mine, or, it is different from me {i e. it was 
 not I), &c. 
 
 Kihai i and kahore i are most frequently used 
 indifferently one for the other. An experienced 
 speaker will, however, we think, sometimes notice 
 points of difference, and particularly that kihai i is 
 most frequently employed when reference is made to 
 an act previous to a past act, and kahore i when some 
 allusion is made to the present time. Thus, in the 
 following sentence, " Nau i kai nga kai kihai nei i 
 tika kia kainga e te mea noa," we should prefer 
 kahore nei i to denote which was not. and is not, lawful 
 to be eaten by a person not tapu. In Waikato, haunga 
 with kahore sometimes governs a genitive case ; e g. 
 Kahore haunga o tena. Kahore, when it takes a 
 possessive case after it, will require it to be in the 
 plural number, e.g. Kahore aku moni, I have no money, 
 lit. there is a negativeness of my moneys. So also the 
 particle u, vide page 91. 
 
 * Some foreigners, we observe, omit the % after kihai when it immedi- 
 ately follows it. That this error, however, arises from the i being blended 
 into the ai of kihai in the pronunciation is clear from its being distinctly 
 heard when a word intervenes to prevent elision, as in the following 
 example : Kihai ahau i pai. 
 
162 SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITIONS, &C. 
 
 In answering a question, the answer will always be 
 regulated by the way in which the question is put, 
 e.g. Kahore i pai ? as ; Was he not witling ? Yes ; i.e. 
 Yes, he was not willing. If the answer was intended 
 to be affirmative, the speaker would have said " I pai 
 ano." 
 
 FINIS. 
 
 WILSONS AND HORTON, GENERAL PRINTERS, AUCKLAND, N Z 
 KO WIRIIIANA MA RATOU KO HOTENE, NGA KAI-TA, KEI AKARANA. 
 
OTHER WORKS 
 
 WILLIAMS' DICTIONARY OF THE MAORI 
 
 LANGUAGE, by Archdeacon Williams, B. A. . . 12 6 
 
 WILLIAMS' FIRST LESSONS IN MAORI ..16 
 
 HEKE'S WAR, Diary of Rev. R. Burrows ..10 
 
 POLYNESIAN MYTHOLOGY, by Sir Geo. Grey ..50 
 
 OLD NEW ZEALAND, by the late Judge Maning . . 2 6 
 
 LIFE OF ARCHDEACON HENRY WILLIAMS, 
 
 by Hugh Carleton, 2 vols. . . . . . . 23 
 
 CHRISTIANITY AMONGST NEW ZEALANDERS, 
 
 by Bishop Williams . . . . . . ..76 
 
 OUR LAST YEAR IN NEW ZEALAND, by Bishop 
 
 Cowie . . . . . . . . ..76 
 
 LIFE OF BISHOP SELWYN, by Canon Curteis ..76 
 
 LIFE AND TIMES OF PATUONE, THE CELE- 
 BRATED NGAPUHI CHIEF, by C. O. Davis ..36 
 
 CAMP LIFE IN FIORDLAND, NEW ZEALAND, 
 
 by W. McHutcheson c . . . . . ..36 
 
 MANUAL OF NEW ZEALAND MOLLUSCA, by 
 
 Professor Hutton . . . . . . ..30 
 
 LABOUR LAWS OF NEW ZEALAND ..2 
 
 THE LITERATURE RELATING TO NEW ZEA- 
 LANDA BIBLIOGRAPHY.. .. ..2 6 
 
 INTRODUCTORY CLASS BOOK OF BOTANY, 
 FOR USE IN NEW ZEALAND SCHOOLS, by 
 G. M. Thomson, F.L.S. . . . . ..26 
 
 HISTORY OF TARANAKI A Standard Work on 
 
 the History of the Province, by B. Wells . . 5 
 
 A SKETCH OF OTAGO, by J. Mclndoe . . ..26 
 
 WANDERINGS WITH TE WHITI AND TOHU, 
 
 by J. P. Ward . . . . . . ..20 
 
SUGGESTIONS FOR A HISTORY OF THE ORIGIN 
 AND MIGRATIONS OF THE MAORI PEOPLE, 
 by F. D. Fenton . . . . . . ..50 
 
 FRONTIER LIFE TAR AN AKI, NEW ZEALAND, 
 
 by E. S. Brookes, J. P. 
 
 LIFE AND TIMES OF SIR GEORGE GREY, by 
 
 W. L. and L. Rees . . . . . . ..76 
 
 FERNS AND FERN ALLIES OF NEW ZEALAND, 
 
 by G. M. Thomson, F.L.S. . . . . ..66 
 
 LAYS OF NORTHERN ZEALANDIA, by E. S. Garton 2 6 
 
 ANCIENT HISTORY OF THE MAORI, by John 
 
 White, vol. 6. (vols. 1 to 5 out of print) . . ..76 
 
 HISTORY AND TRADITIONS OF THE MAORIS 
 FROM 1820 TO THE SIGNING OF THE 
 TREATY OF WAITANGI IN 1840, by "W. T. 
 Gudgeon . . . . . . . . ..50 
 
 REPORT OF THE ERUPTION OF TARAWERA 
 AND ROTOMAHANA, by Prof. A. P. W. Thomas, 
 M.A., F.L.S. .. .. .. .. ..2 6 
 
 SOUNDS, LAKES, & RIVERS OF NEW ZEALAND 2 6 
 
 NEW ZEALAND LONE LANDS, BEING NOTES 
 OF A VISIT TO THE OUTLYING ISLANDS, 
 
 by R. Carrick.. .. .. .. ..10 
 
 AORANGI: OR, THE HEART OF THE SOUTHERN 
 
 ALPS, by M. Ross .. .. .. ..10 
 
 FOREST FLORA OF NEW ZEALAND, by T. Kirk 12 6 
 
 DURABILITY OF NEW ZEALAND TIMBER, by 
 
 T. Kirk, F.L.S. .. .. .. ..2 
 
 HANDBOOK OF NEW ZEALAND FISHES, by 
 
 R. A. A. Sherrin . . . . . . ..20 
 
 TROUT IN NEW ZEALAND, by W. H. Spackman 2 6 
 
 INDIGENOUS GRASSES OF NEW ZEALAND, by 
 
 J. Buchanan, half -morocco .. .. .. 15 
 

 RETURN TO D 
 
 oH- -| 
 
 ORROWED 
 
 
 C, R CULAT,ON mAKmstr 
 
 Renewed books are subject to immediate recall. 
 
 JUN 1 6 1974 8 9 
 
 RECD ClkC L)UT 
 
 dttN ? '?< > 9 9- 
 
 / LD 21-32r-3,'74 
 (R7057sl0)476 A-32 
 
 . General Library 
 University of California 
 Berkeley